316
SYSTEM FOR PC FA OPERATORS MANUAL B–75044EN/02 © FANUC LTD, 1994

B-75044EN/02 FA System for PC Parameter manualftp.ruigongye.com/200807/fanucfasystemfor02.pdf · This manual describes FANUC FA SYSTEM for PC (from here on referred to as FA SYSTEM

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

SYSTEM FOR PCFA

OPERATORS MANUAL

B–75044EN/02© FANUC LTD, 1994

– No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.– All specifications and designs are subject to change without

notice.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe allthe various matters.However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not bedone, or which cannot be done, because there are so manypossibilities.Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possiblein this manual should be regarded as ’’impossible’

s-1

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to

the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their

bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

� Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is

a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being

damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the

approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE

Notes is used to indicate supplementary information other than

Warnings and Cautions.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-75044EN/02

s-2

Precautions to Operate NC Machine

When you control an actual NC machine with the NC programs transferred by

this software, please observe the following precautions for safety.

WARNING

1 Before attempting to use an NC program to control NC machines,

ensure that those machines and tools that will be under the control of

the NC program will operate safely.

If an invalid NC program is used, or if NC program (confirmed as

being satisfactory) is applied incorrectly, the machine and tool may

behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, machine, and/or

work-piece, and presenting the risk of injury to the operator and/or

bystanders.

2 The software described herein does not check whether a transferring

NC program is fully compatible with the target machine. When using

the NC program to control an actual NC machine, Precaution 1 must

be observed.

3 Due to deterioration of the storage medium, or as a result of errors

introduced during communication, the NC program actually loaded

into a machine might vary slightly from that originally created.

Therefore, even when using an NC program that has already been

used successfully with an actual machine, Precaution 1 must be

observed.

Note) In this document, the term “NC program” refers to programs that

specify NC machine operations. Note that in NC machine manuals,

“machining program”, “part program”, or “program” may be used in

place of “NC program”. The above precautions are applied for these

terms that have the same meaning of “NC program”.

B-75044EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s-3

Precautions to Operate FA SYSTEM for PC

Precautions about FA SYSTEM for PC are described after the next chapter of

this manual and near below.

Before you use the software, please read the contents of WARNING,

CAUTION, and NOTE carefully.

- Precaution to DNC Operation

- About Exclusive Control of Files

WARNING

1 Before attempting to do DNC operation, confirm that the NC program

is correct.

If an invalid NC program is used, the machine and tool may behave

unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, machine, and/or work-

piece, and presenting the risk of injury to the operator and/or

bystanders.

2 When doing DNC operation, avoid cutting a work-piece without a test

cutting.

Ensure that NC machines and tool under the control of DNC operation

will operate safely by using the functions such as “single block”,

“feed-rate override”, and “machine lock”.

If an invalid NC program is used, the machine and tool may behave

unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, machine, and/or work-

piece, and presenting the risk of injury to the operator and/or

bystanders.

CAUTION

DNC operation might pause for a second according to the

performance of a computer, the number of NCs connecting to the

computer, or the communication buffer size attached to NC side.

When you use a software such as a word processing operation, DNC

operation might pause.

In this case, reduce the number of NCs that are doing DNC operation

at the same time.

CAUTION

One NC program can’t be handled by the following operations at the

same time; Download, Upload, Edit, Copy, Move, Delete.

B-75044EN/02 PREFACE

p-1

Preface

This manual describes FANUC FA SYSTEM for PC (from here on referred to

as FA SYSTEM for PC) that runs on a personal computer.

The software of FA SYSTEM for PC supports three communications

produced by FANUC; DNC1, DNC2 and Reader/Puncher interface. And data,

such as NC programs, can be transferred from a computer to NCs.

This manual also describes the information about the NCs produced by

FANUC and its communication protocols, DNC1, DNC2 and

Reader/Puncher interface.

But, all related information is not mentioned in this manual.

For more information about these communication protocols, please refer to

the following manuals.

(1) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by DNC1

� FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61782E)

� CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATOR’S MANUAL for

the NC connected by DNC1

(2) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by DNC2

� FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E)

� CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATOR’S MANUAL for

the NC connected by DNC2

(3) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by Reader/ Puncher

� RS-232-C/RS-422 INTERFACE CONNECTING MANUAL(B-

60043E)

� CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATOR’S MANUAL for

the NC connected by Reader/ Puncher

(4) In case of connecting a computer to NCs by the DNC1/Ethernet interface

� FANUC ETHERNET BOARD OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-

63354EN)

� CONNECTING/MAINTENANCE/OPERATOR'S MANUAL of

the NCs connected by the DNC1/Ethernet interface

To use this software (FA SYSTEM for PC), you must accept the following

agreement.

Software Agreement

(1) By purchasing the software( FA SYSTEM for PC, and this manual), you

can only use it. but you can’t hold copyright on the software.

(2) You can use the software at only one computer per one package.

PREFACE B-75044EN/02

p-2

Content of This Manual

FA SYSTEM for PC is the software package to connect a computer to NCs,

and controls them from a computer. FA SYSTEM for PC has the two software

series numbers as follows:

� FA LIBRARY for Windows NT / A08B-9510-J510 (from here on

referred to as FA LIBRARY)

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT for Windows NT / A08B-9510-J511

(from here on referred to as NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT)

In this manual, the “FA SYSTEM for PC” term is used the explanations

related with both of “FA LIBRARY” and “NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT”.

This manual explains FA SYSTEM for PC described below.

PREFACE

PREFACE is this.

Chapter 1. About FA SYSTEM for PC

Describes the basic features of FA SYSTEM for PC.

This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses either NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY.

Chapter 2. Setup

Describes the installation and setup of FA SYSTEM for PC.

This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses either NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY.

Chapter 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

Describes how to use NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.

This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.

Chapter 4. FA LIBRARY

Describes how to make a application program by using FA

LIBRARY.

This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses FA

LIBRARY.

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT includes FA LIBRARY. So, the

customer of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can make

application programs too. In that case, they must read this chapter.

B-75044EN/02 PREFACE

p-3

Chapter 5. Observation of FA SYSTEM for PC

Describes a logging information of FA SYSTEM for PC.

This Chapter must be read by the customer who uses either NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY.

Chapter 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT

Describes how to manage List Files by the FA SYSTEM for PC.

Also read this chapter if you are using either of NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT or FA LIBRARY.

APPENDIX

Contains additional information related to FA SYSTEM for PC.

Microsoft, WindowsNT, and Visual Basic are registered trademarks and

Visual C++ is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Digi Board is a registered trademark and PC/4e and PC/8e are trademarks of

Digi International Inc.

B-75044EN/02

c-1

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

PREFACE

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC ................................................................ 1

1.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................2

1.2 RELATION BETWEEN FA SYSTEM FOR PC AND PROTOCOLS ............................5

1.3 TRANSMITTING NC PROGRAM................................................................................7

1.3.1 Transmitting by Operating NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.......................................................7

1.3.2 Transmitting by Using FA LIBRARY..............................................................................................8

1.3.3 Transmitting by Operating NC Side...............................................................................................10

1.4 ABOUT NC PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................................................ 13

1.5 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION................................................................. 14

1.5.1 Details of Subprogram Separate Transfer Function ......................................................................16

1.5.2 Details of Subprogram Extended Transfer Function ......................................................................17

1.6 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .......................................................................... 18

1.6.1 Details of List File Separate Transfer Function..............................................................................20

1.6.2 Details of List File Extended Transfer Function ............................................................................21

1.6.3 List File Transfer Monitor and Control Functions .........................................................................21

2. SETUP................................................................................................... 23

2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................... 24

2.2 DNC1 ........................................................................................................................26

2.3 DNC2, READER/PUNCHER..................................................................................... 27

2.4 SETTING FA SYSTEM FOR PC............................................................................... 29

2.4.1 Setting up TCP/IP ..........................................................................................................................29

2.4.2 Adding Internet Service .................................................................................................................30

2.4.3 For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC....................................................................................................31

2.5 STARTING AND STOPPING THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS .......................... 34

2.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 35

2.6.1 Machine Information Settings ........................................................................................................35

2.6.2 General Settings for Machine.........................................................................................................36

2.6.3 Communication Settings for Machine ............................................................................................38

2.6.4 Download Settings for Machine.....................................................................................................43

2.6.5 Upload Settings for Machine..........................................................................................................44

2.6.6 Saving and Restoring Settings........................................................................................................45

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ........................................................... 47

3.1 OUTLINE .................................................................................................................. 48

3.2 USING NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT................................................................... 49

3.2.1 About The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Window ...............................................................49

3.2.2 Work with the File List ..................................................................................................................51

CONTENTS B-75044EN/02

c-2

3.2.3 Work with the Directory List .........................................................................................................54

3.2.4 Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files ...........................................................................56

3.2.5 Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files ....................................................................................58

3.2.6 Transmitting an NC Program .........................................................................................................61

3.2.7 Selecting the NC Program on the PC .............................................................................................66

3.2.8 Setting Options...............................................................................................................................69

4. FA LIBRARY ......................................................................................... 71

4.1 OUTLINE .................................................................................................................. 72

4.1.1 Service Type ..................................................................................................................................72

4.1.2 How to Read the Library Function .................................................................................................73

4.1.3 About the Development Language of the Application Program.....................................................74

4.1.4 About Starting Applications You Have Developed........................................................................75

4.1.5 About Sample Program ..................................................................................................................76

4.2 SYSTEM SERVICE................................................................................................... 95

4.2.1 Start of Communication Process < F_CreateCommunication > * ..................................................96

4.2.2 End of Communication Process < F_TerminateCommunication > * .............................................97

4.2.3 Start of Communication < F_Open > .............................................................................................98

4.2.4 Stop of Communication < F_Close >.............................................................................................99

4.2.5 Confirmation of Communication < F_IsOpen >............................................................................99

4.2.6 Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers <F_GetAllMachineNumber > ..............................100

4.2.7 Getting List of Communicating Machines < F_GetOpenMachineNumber > ...............................102

4.2.8 Start of Receiving Notice Message < F_StartNotice >.................................................................103

4.2.9 End of Receiving Notice Message < F_StopNotice >..................................................................104

4.2.10 Getting Descriptor ID of Notice Message < F_GetNoticeID >....................................................104

4.2.11 Getting the Notice Message of the File Transfer < F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer > .......................105

4.2.12 Getting Information about Machine < F_GetMachineInfo > .......................................................106

4.3 REQUEST SERVICE .............................................................................................. 107

4.3.1 Downloading NC Program requested by Computer < F_Download... > ......................................107

4.3.2 Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer < F_Upload... > ..............................................111

4.3.3 External Reset < F_Reset >..........................................................................................................114

4.3.4 Cycle Start < F_Start >.................................................................................................................115

4.3.5 Selecting NC Program in NC < F_Select >..................................................................................116

4.3.6 Deleting NC Program in NC < F_Delete > ..................................................................................117

4.3.7 Reading NC Identification < F_Identify > ...................................................................................119

4.3.8 Reading List of NC Program in NC < F_AllFileDirectory > .......................................................120

4.3.9 Establishing DNC1 Connection < F_EstablishDnc1 >.................................................................123

4.3.10 Confirmation of DNC1 Connection < F_ConfirmDnc1 >............................................................124

4.3.11 Reading Alarm Information < F_ReadAlarm >............................................................................126

4.3.12 Reading Tool Offset < F_ReadToolOffset >................................................................................128

4.3.13 Writing Tool Offset < F_WriteToolOffset >................................................................................132

4.3.14 Reading Custom Macro Variable < F_ReadCustomMacroVariable > .........................................135

4.3.15 Writing Custom Macro Variable < F_WriteCustomMacroVariable > .........................................138

4.3.16 Reading Tool Life Management Information < F_ReadToolLife > .............................................140

B-75044EN/02 CONTENTS

c-3

4.3.17 Reading PMC Data < F_ReadPMCData >...................................................................................144

4.3.18 Writing PMC Data< F_WritePMCData >....................................................................................146

4.3.19 Reading NC Parameters < F_ReadParameter > ...........................................................................148

4.3.20 Writing NC Parameters < F_WriteParameter > ...........................................................................151

4.3.21 Computer Start DNC Operation < F_Dnc... >..............................................................................153

4.3.22 Canceling Computer Start Download < F_DownloadCancel >....................................................157

4.3.23 Canceling Computer Start Upload < F_UploadCancel > .............................................................158

4.4 DIAGNOSIS AND OTHER SERVICES ................................................................... 159

4.4.1 Initialization Processing < F_Begin > ..........................................................................................159

4.4.2 Getting Number of Data < F_GetCount > ....................................................................................159

4.4.3 Moving Offset Location of Data < F_Seek > ...............................................................................160

4.4.4 Freeing Descriptor ID < F_FreeID >............................................................................................160

4.4.5 Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment < F_Response >.......................................................161

4.4.6 Getting Error Code < F_GetLastError > ......................................................................................161

4.4.7 End of FA LIBRARY < F_End > ................................................................................................162

4.5 LOG LIBRARY........................................................................................................ 163

4.5.1 Starting LogServer < F_InvokeLogServer > ................................................................................165

4.5.2 Terminating LogServer < F_TerminateLogServer >....................................................................165

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC........................................... 166

5.1 LOG VIEWER......................................................................................................... 167

5.1.1 About Log Message .....................................................................................................................167

5.1.2 The Contents of Transmission Log File .......................................................................................169

5.1.3 The Contents of Log File .............................................................................................................170

5.1.4 About Log Viewer........................................................................................................................171

5.1.5 Using Log Viewer ........................................................................................................................172

5.2 LogServer ............................................................................................................... 177

5.2.1 Setting log creation ON/OFF .......................................................................................................177

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT ................................................................. 179

6.1 EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS............................................................... 180

6.1.1 Structure of Edit List File Screen .................................................................................................180

6.1.2 Editing List Files ..........................................................................................................................183

6.2 LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS ...................................................... 189

6.2.1 Structure of List File Monitor Screen...........................................................................................189

6.2.2 List File Monitor Operations........................................................................................................190

CONTENTS B-75044EN/02

c-4

APPENDIX

A. SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS........................................ 195

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC ......................................................... 199

B.1 DNC1, DNC2 .......................................................................................................... 200

B.2 READER/PUNCHER............................................................................................... 205

B.3 DNC1/ETHERNET.................................................................................................. 213

C. ERROR CODE .................................................................................... 214

D. DNC1................................................................................................... 235

D.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR DNC1 BOARD ................................................... 237

D.2 CONDITIONS FOR USING THE DNC1 DRIVER.................................................... 239

D.3 SETTING UP THE DNC1 BOARD .......................................................................... 240

D.4 SETTING UP DNC1 DRIVER ................................................................................. 241

D.5 Dnc1HardTest......................................................................................................... 246

D.6 Dnc1Test ................................................................................................................ 251

D.7 Dnc1LogViewer....................................................................................................... 268

D.8 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION OF DNC1BOARD ............................................... 273

D.9 DNC1 BOARD, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE AND

OPTICAL CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 276

D.10 PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING RELATED PARTS......................................... 277

D.11 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ............................................................................ 280

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-1-

1 ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-2-

1.1 OVERVIEW

FA LIBRARY provides library functions and machine settings. The library

functions can be used for developing a user-application.

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is the software package that combines FA

LIBRARY with the management of NC programs supplied by FANUC. NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can transmit an NC program without

developing a user-application. And then you can grow your own system by

using FA LIBRARY included in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.

FA SYSTEM for PC has the communication process, which supports the

communication protocol of DNC1, DNC2 and Reader/Puncher Interface.

DNC1 is the private network developed by FANUC. FA SYSTEM for PC is

compatible with “Mode1” of DNC1 protocol. “Mode1” enables a computer to

act as “Primary Station”, and the computer can be connected with the several

NCs of “Secondary Station”.

Software Configuration

COMMUNICATION

PROCESS

The Offer of NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT(A08B-9510-J511)

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

User-Application developed by a customer

The Offer of

FA LIBRARY(A08B-9510-J510)

FA LIBRARY

DNC1 DNC2 Reader/Puncher

NC NC NC

DNC1 RS232C RS232C

Computer

Machine Settings

DNC1/Ethernet

NC

Ethernet

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-3-

DNC1 is a private network developed by FANUC. FA SYSTEM for PC is

compatible with "Mode1" of DNC1 protocol. Mode1 enables multi-point

communication where a computer acts as the primary station and controls

multiple NCs. A computer can be connected with a maximum of 16 NCs by

DNC1. Refer to “FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61782E)” for details

of DNC1.

DNC2 is the communication protocol that enables the computer to transmit

various data to the NC. A computer is connected to an NC by RS232C.

Refer to “FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-61992E)” for details of

DNC2.

Reader/Puncher interface is the input/output function of an NC which can

connect input/output devices such as FANUC HANDY FILE. By operating an

NC side, an NC program can be transmitted between the NC and the

computer.

Refer to Section “Input/Output of Data” in each NC operator’s manual and

“RS-232-C/RS-422 INTERFACE CONNECT-ING MANUAL (B-60043E)”

for details of Reader /Puncher.

RS232C

Adapter

The standard RS232C port or the adapter board is used

for DNC2.

ComputerNCNC

����NC

Maximum of 8 NCs (NOTE)

Computer

DNC1

Board

NCNC ����

Maximum of 16 NCs

NC

DNC1 Board is supplied by FANUC

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-4-

DNC1/Ethernet is a communication protocol for connecting the NC to the

computer by Ethernet to enable data transactions between the NC and the

computer.

RS232C

Adapter

The adapter board is used for Reader/Puncher.

ComputerNCNC

����NC

Maximum of 8 NCs (NOTE)

Computer

Ethernet

board

NCNC ����

Maximum of 64 NCs

NC

Use a third-party computer Ethernet board.

NOTE

In the above figures, the maximum numbers are the number of NCs

connected to one computer by using the RS-232-C adapter board. It is

the sum of NCs communicated with DNC2 and Reader/Puncher.

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-5-

1.2 RELATION BETWEEN FA SYSTEM FOR PC AND PROTOCOLS

FA SYSTEM for PC supports the protocols of DNC1, DNC2,

Reader/Puncher and DNC1/Ethernet. And the available functions of NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT and FA LIBRARY depend upon the capability

of each protocol as follows.

Functions of FA LIBRARY (A08B-9510-J510)

A user-application developed by using FA LIBRARY can take the functions

like these:

(1) For DNC1 or DNC2

� Downloading an NC program to an NC.

� Uploading an NC program from an NC

� External reset

� Selecting and deleting an NC program saved in an NC

� Listing NC programs saved in an NC

� Reading the alarm information in an NC

� Reading and writing the tool offset data

� Reading and writing the custom macro variables

� Reading the tool life data

� Reading and writing PMC data

� Reading the system identify of an NC

� Informs the start and completion of download required by NC

� Informs the start and completion of upload required by NC

(2) For Reader/Puncher protocol:

� Informs the start and completion of download required by NC

� Informs the start and completion of upload required by NC

(3) For DNC1/Ethernet

� Downloading an NC program to an NC

� Uploading an NC program from an NC

� DNC operation

� Selecting and deleting an NC program saved in an NC

� Reading the NC directory information

� Reading the alarm information in an NC

� Reading and writing the custom macro variables

� Reading and writing the tool life data (scheduled to be supported)

� Reading and writing PMC data

� Reading the system identify of an NC

� Reading and writing NC parameters

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-6-

Functions of NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT (A08B-9510-J511)

(1) For DNC1 or DNC2

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can handle the following functions by

operating a computer.

� A computer can download an NC program to an NC memory.

� A computer can upload an NC program from an NC memory.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can display the list of NC

programs saved in the NC memory.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete the NC program

saved in the NC memory.

The following functions can be handled by operating the CRT/MDI on

an NC.

� An NC can read an NC program from a computer.

� An NC can punch an NC program to a computer.

� An NC can call an NC program saved in a computer for DNC

operation.

(2) For Reader/Puncher

The following functions can be handled by operating the CRT/MDI on

an NC.

� An NC can read an NC program from a computer.

� An NC can punch an NC program to a computer.

� An NC can display the list of NC programs saved in a computer.

� An NC can delete an NC program saved in a computer.

� An NC can call an NC program saved in a computer for DNC

operation.

(3) For DNC1/Ethernet

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can handle the following functions by

operating a computer:

� A computer can download an NC program to NC memory.

� A computer can upload an NC program from NC memory.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can display the list of NC

programs saved in the NC memory.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete the NC program

saved in NC memory.

NOTE

When you uses the Reader/Puncher for some old types of NCs, it is

impossible to use several above functions, or it is necessary to add NC

optional parameters.

NOTE

DNC1/Ethernet communication does not allow download or upload by

CRT/MDI operations on the NC. (scheduled to be supported)

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-7-

1.3 TRANSMITTING NC PROGRAM

A main feature of FA SYSTEM for PC is its ability to transmit an NC

program. This section describes the way to transmit an NC program of NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT and FA LIBRARY.

1.3.1 Transmitting by Operating NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

When a computer is connected to an NC by DNC1 or DNC2 or

DNC1/Ethernet, an NC program can be transmitted by operating NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen. The NC programs to be downloaded

are placed under the specific directory for every NC. This directory is called

“default-directory”.

The uploaded NC programs are saved in this default-directory too.

Machine 1

Machine 2

File System in Computer

� File

� Directory, Drive

Associates with the default

directory for Machine 2

Files are transmitted between Machine 2 and directory D

Associates with the default

directory for Machine 1

Files are transmitted

between Machine 1 and

directory C

Directory B

Drive A

Directory C

Directory D

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-8-

Both of “default-directory” and the list of NC programs saved in the NC

memory are displayed on NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen. A NC

program can be transmitted by operating this screen.

A NC program can be transmitted by the menu of the screen.

Files that are stored in “default-directory

The list of NC programs stored in the NC

memory

Refer to Chapter 2 “Setup” for modifying the default-directory.

Refer to Chapter 3 “NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT” for operating the

screen.

1.3.2 Transmitting by Using FA LIBRARY

When FA LIBRARY transmits an NC program, it uses the key. The key

means the information about “Which file should be transmitted ?” when an

NC program attempt to be transmitted. The four kinds of keys are classified

according to a file name, a file number, an NC program number, and the file

specified by full-path.

FA LIBRARY selects the NC program by using the key, and attempts to

decide the program according to the next table.

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-9-

The Way to Decide the Downloading Program

Used Key Selected Program

File Name The file of the same name is selected in the default-directory.

NC program number The file named “OXXXX.DAT” is selected from the default-directory.

Where, “XXXX” is equal to an NC program number, and “DAT” indicates the file extension

called “default-extension”.

This default-extension can be modified. Refer to Chapter 2 “Setup” for modifying the

default-extension.

File Number The files in the default-directory are stored in order of ASCII code, and the file is selected

according to that order.

Full-Path The file specified by the full-path is selected.

FA LIBRARY uploads an NC program from the NC memory by specifying an

NC program number, and attempts to save it by using either of two keys

shown as the next table.

1. FILE_A.TXT

2. FILE_B.TXT

3. O0001.DAT

4. O0003.DAT

5. WORK1.DOC

6. WORK2.DOC

When the file name “FILE_B.TXT” is set to the key, this

file is downloaded.

When the NC program number “0003” is set to the key,

this file is downloaded.

When the file number “6” is set to the key, this file is

downloaded.

Default-directory for Machine 1 in

Computer

Machine 1

FILE.DOC

The “C: PATH” directory in

Computer

When the full-path “C: PATH FILE.DOC” is set to the

key, the specified file is downloaded independently of

the default-directory.

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-10-

The Way to Store the Uploaded Program

Used Key The Way to Store the Program

NC program number The uploaded NC Program is named “OXXXX.DAT” which is composed of the key and the

default-extension ”DAT”, and is saved in the default-directory.

Full-Path The uploaded NC program is saved according to the specified path.

These keys are specified by arguments of the FA LIBRARY functions. Refer

to Chapter 4 “FA LIBRARY” for details.

1.3.3 Transmitting by Operating NC Side

When attempting to transmit the NC program by operating the CRT/MDI of

an NC, the file directory in a computer can’t be specified.

Only a file name, a file number, and an NC program number can be specified

by operating an NC.

FA SYSTEM for PC relates a file name, a file number, and an NC program

number with the files stored in the directory of a computer.

Where, the key is equal to either of a file name, a file number, or an NC

program number.

FA SYSTEM for PC selects the NC program stored in the default-directory.

However, the NC type and its communicating protocol limit the effective key

and the way to specify the file name, file number, and NC program number on

an NC.

Refer to Appendix 2 “Sample Operation for NC” about the way to select the

NC program by operating an NC.

O0001.DAT

When the “O0001” in the NC memory is uploaded

and the NC program number “0001” key is used,

the file is named “O0001.DAT”.

Default-directory for Machine 1 in

Computer

Machine 1

When the “O0001” in the NC memory is uploaded

and the “C: PATH FILE.DOC” key is used, the

file is named “FILE.DOC”.FILE.DOC

The “C: PATH” directory in

Computer

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-11-

The following table shows the effective keys according to the protocol.

Relation between Key and Protocol

Protocol The Requirement for Usable Key

Transmitting Program File Name NC program

number

File Number

DNC1, Downloading Program by Operating NC ��

DNC2 Uploading Program by Operating NC ��

Reader/ Downloading Program by Operating NC ∆ � ∆

Puncher Uploading Program by Operating NC ∆ ∆ �

DNC1/Ethernet Downloading and Uploading Program Are Not Possible

by Operating NC

� : can be used

� : can not be used

∆ : The NC types cause whether the key is used or not.

The next table shows the way to select the NC program which attempt to be

downloaded by operating an NC .

The Way to Decide the Downloading Program

Used Key Selected Program

File Name The file of the same name is selected in the default-directory.

NC program number the file named “OXXXX.DAT” is selected in the default-directory.

Where, “XXXX” is equal to an NC program number, and “DAT” indicates the file

extension called “default-extension”.

This default-extension can be modified.

File Number The files in the default-directory are arranged in order of ASCII code, and the file is

selected according to that order.

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-12-

The NC program uploaded by operating an NC attempts to be saved shown as

the next table.

The Way to Store the Uploaded Program

Used Key The Way to Store the Program

File Name The uploaded NC program is named for the file name which is entered by operating an

NC, and it is saved in the default-directory.

NC program number The uploaded NC program is named “OXXXX. DAT” which is composed of the NC

program number (which is entered by operatiing an NC) and the default-extension

“DAT”, and it is saved in the default-directory.

Refer to Appendix 2 “Sample Operation for NC” about the relation between

the file name interpreted by FA SYSTEM for PC and the operation of an

NC side.

O0001

O0001.DAT

When a file name “O0001” is entered by operating an

NC and the “O0001” is uploaded, the file is named

“O0001”.

When the file name “FILE_B.TXT” is entered by

operating an NC, this file is downloaded.

Default-directory for Machine1 in

Computer

When the NC program number “0003” is entered by

operating an NC, this file is downloaded.

Machine 1

When the file number “6” is entered by operating an

NC, the sixth file is downloaded.

When an NC program number “0001” is entered by

operating an NC and the “O0001” is uploaded, the file

is named “O0001.DAT”.

Machine 1

1. FILE_A.TXT

2. FILE_B.TXT

3. O0001.DAT

4. O0003.DAT

5. WORK1.DOC

6. WORK2.DOC

Default-directory for Machine 1 in

Computer

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-13-

1.4 ABOUT NC PROGRAM FORMAT

FA SYSTEM for PC manages NC programs in a computer as follows.

Sample 1 : Main program terminated by the M30 code

% ; OXXXX ; ���� ���� ���� Part Program ���� ���� ���� ; M30 ; %

Sample 2 : Main program terminated by the M02 code

% ; OXXXX ; ���� ���� ���� Part Program ���� ���� ���� ; M02 ; %

Sample 3 : Sub program terminated by the M99 code

% ; OXXXX ; ���� ���� ���� Part Program ���� ���� ���� ; M99 ; %

These programs should be formed such as one main program format or one

sub program format, including one NC program number in head of the part-

program.

Where, “;” means the end of a block, and corresponds to the EOB code

specified by NC such as the LF code.

“XXXX” indicates an NC program number.

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-14-

1.5 SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION

What Is The Subprogram Transfer Function?

The “subprogram transfer function” downloads the subprogram together with

the NC program if the NC program contains a subprogram call when the NC

program is downloaded.

Subprogram transfer has two modes: separate transfer and extended transfer.

(1) Separate transfer mode

This mode parses the main program, and sends the required subprogram

appended to the main program if a subprogram call is specified in the

main program.

(2) Extended transfer mode

This mode parses the main program, and sends the subprogram

imbedded in the main program if a subprogram call is specified in the

main program.

You can select one of “Not Transferred/Separate Transfer/Extended Transfer”

for the subprogram on each machine in the Machine Setup menu.

NOTE

This function can be used only when the Reader/Puncher interface is

used.

%

O0001

(MAIN START)

M98P5001

(MAIN END)

M30

%

%

O5001

(SUB START)

(SUB END)

M99

%

%

O0001

(MAIN START)

(SUB START)

(SUB END)

(MAIN END)

M30

%

%

O0001

(MAIN START)

M98P5001

(MAIN END)

M30

O5001

(SUB START)

(SUB END)

M99

%

Subprogram

separate transfer

Subprogram

extended transfer

Main program Subprogram

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-15-

Subprogram File Names

Subprogram file names must be specified in the following format:

“O” + 4-digit number + “.” + 3-letter extension

Example: O0001.DAT

Register the extension in the [Subprogram Extension] in the [General] panel

in the Machine Setup menu.

Subprogram File Format

Only one O number and M99 code each are both required in the subprogram

file. See Example 3 in “1.4 About NC Program Format.”

Subprogram files containing repeated O numbers and M99 codes cannot be

sent. Calling a subprogram containing an M02 or M30 code instead of an

M99 code will result in an error.

Subprogram File Directory

Up to three directories for storing subprogram files can be set in the

[Subprogram Search Directory 1 to 3] in the [Download] panel in the

Machine Setup menu. The subprogram search order of priority is set to the

three directories. For example, if the No.1 directory and No.2 directory hold a

program having the same name, the subprogram in the No.1 directory is sent.

Subprogram Non-call Setting

You can disable subprogram transfer even if a subprogram is called by the

main program. For example, you can set “Not to send subprograms in lines

8000 to 9000 as they are stored in NC memory.” You can set this in 1000-line

units in the [Subprograms Not To Send] in the [Download] panel in the

Machine Setup menu.

Subprogram Call Code Setting

You can set the call code by which the subprogram is sent. Call types M98,

G65 and G66 are supported, and subprogram transfer is carried out only for

the call type you have set.

Set the call code in the [Call Type] in the [Download] panel in the Machine

Setup menu.

NOTE

Subprograms are searched only from the directories set in the

[Subprogram Search Directory 1 to 3]. To store a subprogram in the

default directory, specify the same directory as the default directory

somewhere in the [Subprogram Search Directory 1 to 3].

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-16-

1.5.1 Details of Subprogram Separate Transfer Function

Subprogram Call Formats

The following four subprogram call formats can be used in the main program:

(1) M98PxxxxLyy

(2) M98Pyyxxxx

(3) G65PxxxxLyy

(4) G66PxxxxLyy

where,

xxxx: program number

yy: call repeat count (This can be omitted.)

In the case of format (2), a 4-digit number is needed for the program number.

Note, however, that in the separate transfer mode subprograms that are called

more than once due to the relationship between the main and subprograms are

transferred only once. So, the call repeat count is ignored.

The subprogram call nesting level is 8.

If the control discovers that the currently called subprogram does not exist in

the main program, an error occurs when an attempt is made to send the non-

existent subprogram after the main program is sent.

NOTE

1 Program numbers xxxx are limited to numbers that can be directly

specified. Program numbers that are specified by macro variables

cannot be transferred.

2 "M99Pnnnn" (return function to sequence number) cannot be used. At

the point that the subprogram up to the line containing the M99

instruction is read, the system judges that the subprogram has ended

and returns to the main program. The Pnnnn section is ignored.

3 Branch instructions (GOTO, IF, WHILE) are transferred to the NC

without being processed.

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-17-

1.5.2 Details of Subprogram Extended Transfer Function

Subprogram Call Formats

The following four subprogram call formats can be used in the main program:

(1) M98PxxxxLyy

(2) M98Pyyxxxx

(3) G65PxxxxLyy

(4) G66PxxxxLyy

where,

xxxx: program number

yy: call repeat count (This can be omitted.)

In the case of format (2), a 4-digit number is needed for the program number.

In extended transfer, subprograms that are called more than once due to the

relationship between the main and subprograms are sent imbedded in the main

program for the repeated call count.

The subprogram call nesting level is 8.

If the control discovers that the preset directory does not contain the

subprogram currently being called by the main program, an error occurs

immediately. So, transfer of the main program is canceled midway, and the

subprogram is not sent.

NOTE

1 Program numbers xxxx are limited to numbers that can be directly

specified. Program numbers that are specified by macro variables

cannot be transferred.

2 "M99Pnnnn" (return function to sequence number) cannot be used. At

the point that the subprogram up to the line containing the M99

instruction is read, the system judges that the subprogram has ended

and returns to the main program. The Pnnnn section is ignored.

3 Branch instructions (GOTO, IF, WHILE) are transferred to the NC

without being processed.

4 When transferring in the extended transfer mode, only subprograms

cannot be transferred. If only a subprogram is transferred, the "Main

program contains M99." error is generated.

5 Other addresses cannot be specified for the blocks that call the

subprogram:

Example: When the block "M98P9000G00X00Y00" is sent in the

extended transfer mode, the contents of subprogram O9000.DAT can

be sent. However, the G00X00Y00 part cannot be sent.

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-18-

1.6 LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

What Is The "List File Transfer Function?"

The “List File transfer function” sends two or more NC programs described in

the “List File” to the NC.

Create the List File in the Edit List File screen in FA SYSTEM for PC.

Up to 9999 NC programs can be registered to the List File.

The List File transfer has two modes: separate transfer and extended transfer.

� List separate transfer mode

This mode sends NC programs currently registered to List File in order

as they are. This mode assumes that you are registering two or more main

programs to the NC memory.

� List extended transfer mode

This mode deletes the O number and M30 code from the NC programs

currently registered to List File and sends the NC programs as a single

NC program. This mode assumes that two or more NC programs are

linked into a single program for DNC operation.

You can select either of separate transfer or extended transfer for transferring

the List File on each machine in the Machine Setup menu.

NOTE

This function can be used only when the Reader/Puncher interface is

used.

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-19-

List File Name

Register the List File 3-character extension in the [List File Extension] in the

[General] panel in the Machine Setup menu.

List files can be created and edited only in the Edit List File screen in FA

SYSTEM for PC. When they are saved, the List File extension is

automatically set. So, the user need not create a List File while taking its

format into consideration.

When you register [List File Extension] in the Machine Setup menu, only

extensions different from the [Default Extension] and [Subprogram

Extension] can be set. So, the main program “O0001.DAT” and List File

“O0001.LST” can be created.

The List File transfer function is enabled when the NC requests transfer of

files appended with the List File extension.

List File Format

List Files are created and edited only in the Edit List File screen in FA

SYSTEM for PC. So, the user need not create a List File using an editor while

taking its format into consideration.

List File Directory

Save the List File to the directory set in the [Default Directory] in the

Machine Setup menu. After displaying a list of files from the NC in FA

SYSTEM for PC, the List File must be stored to [Default Directory] so that it

can be specified by its file number or file name.

%

O0001

(O0001 DATA)

M30

%

%

O0001

(O0001 DATA)

(O0002 DATA)

(O0003 DATA)

M30

%

%

O0001

(O0001 DATA)

M30

O0002

(O0002 DATA)

M30

O0003

(O0003 DATA)

M30

%

Separate transfer

of list

Extended transfer

of list

O0001.DAT

List File

O0001.LST%

O0002

(O0002 DATA)

M30

%

%

O0003

(O0003 DATA)

M30

%

O0001.DAT

O0002.DAT

O0003.DAT

O0002.DAT

O0003.DAT

Create List File

menu

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-20-

Combinations of List File Transfer and Subprogram Transfer Functions

The following table shows the possible combinations of List File transfer and

subprogram transfer functions:

Subprogram Transfer Mode

Separate Extended

Separate � �List File

Transfer Mode Extended ��

1.6.1 Details of List File Separate Transfer Function

NC program files registered to the List File are sent in the order in which they

were registered.

The details of registered NC program files are sent as they are without the O

number and M02, M30 or M99 codes deleted.

When both the main program and subprograms are specified in the List File

and List File separate transfer is requested, both the main program and

subprograms are sent.

NOTE

1 Separate transfer of NC programs without the O number is not

possible. Transfer of such NC programs results in an error.

2 Separate transfer of NC programs having the same O number is not

possible. Transfer of such NC programs results in an error.

B-75044EN/02 1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-21-

1.6.2 Details of List File Extended Transfer Function

Two or more main programs registered to the List File are sent linked as they

were a single NC program.

The O number and M30 or M02 codes in the registered NC program files are

not sent.

The O number that is sent at the start of extended transfer can be specified by

the following two ways in the Edit File List screen:

(1) The O number of the first NC program registered to the List File is sent.

(2) The O number specified in the [Specify O Number at Extended Transfer]

in the Edit List File screen is sent.

Though extended transfer of NC programs without the O number is possible,

the O number must be specified according to (2) above.

Send the M30 code at the end of extended transfer.

1.6.3 List File Transfer Monitor and Control Functions

When the List File Monitor screen is used, the transfer monitor is displayed.

This allows to control such as pause, skipping transfer and swapping of the

transfer order for NC programs that are in the List File and that have not yet

been sent.

List File Transfer Monitor Display

During List File transfer, you can display which NC programs have not yet

been sent.

This assumes that you know how far transfer has progressed when you are

sending two or more main programs by extended transfer for DNC operation.

NOTE

1 Extended transfer of the main program and subprograms specified in

the List File is not possible. When this is attempted, the M02 or M30

codes in the main program will be deleted. However, the M99 code in

the subprogram will be sent without being deleted.

2 Extended transfer of NC programs having the same O number is not

possible. Transfer of such NC programs results in an error.

1. ABOUT FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-22-

List File Transfer Control Function

During List File transfer, you can carry out the following controls on NC

programs that have not yet been sent:

(1) Pause

Pauses transfer before the specified NC program is sent. The transfer

order of NC programs registered after the paused NC program can be

changed, programs deleted and new programs added.

(2) Skip

Sends the next currently registered NC program without sending the

specified NC program.

(3) Change order

You can change the transfer order.

(4) Delete and add NC programs.

You can delete NC programs registered after the paused NC program or

add new NC programs.

NOTE

1 To use this function, check the [Wait for send buffer to reach 0 before

proceeding to next record in extended transfer mode] check box in the

[Download] panel in the Machine Setup menu.

2 When you actually send data, transfer is influenced by your computer's

send buffer and your NC's receive buffer; so the details displayed on

the monitor screen may not match the details displayed on the NC

screen. For example, the NC program displayed as currently being

sent on the monitor screen may not yet be received on the NC.

NC programs among those registered to the List File that have not yet

started to be sent can be displayed correctly.

NOTE

The List File created in the Edit List File screen is copied to each NC

as the List File to be is browsed when the List File is sent to the NC.

The List File is copied to each NC before transfer is started. The

details currently displayed and edited in the List File Monitor screen is

the List File copied to each NC.

For this reason, details that are paused, order-changed, deleted or

added in the List File Monitor screen are partial changes that are valid

only during List File transfer.

Changes that are always reflected at each transfer must be made in

the Edit List File screen before you transmit the List File.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-23-

2 SETUP

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-24-

2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Your system must suit the following minimum requirements in order to run

FA SYSTEM for PC.

(1) Body of Computer

� Type of PC: PC/AT compatible machine

� CPU: Pentium (75MHz) or higher recommended

� Memory: 32MB RAM or more recommended

� Floppy Disk: one 3.5 inch 1.44MB Drive

� Hard Disk: 85MB Hard Disk or larger recommended

(2) Display

� Resolution: 1024�768 dot or higher recommended

� Color: 16 colors or more

(3) Operating System

� Microsoft Windows NT4.0

+ Windows NT4.0 Service Pack 3

(4) Developing Environment

(You needs the following software tools when you program a user-

application by using FA LIBRARY.)

� Microsoft Visual Basic 5.0 (from here on referred to as VB)

+ Visual Studio97 Service Pack 3 (from here on reffered to as

VB++) or

� Microsoft C++ 5.0

+Visual Studio97 Service pack 3 (from here on referred to as

VC++)

(5) Keyboard

(6) Mouse

(7) DNC1 Board and Software Driver

(In the case that your system uses DNC1 communication)

� Supplied by FANUC: A20B-8100-0070

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-25-

(8) RS-232-C Communication Board

(In the case that your system uses DNC2 or Reader/Puncher)

Use the following boards made by Digi International as the RS-232-C

communication boards:

� AccelePort 4r-ISA (for 4 ports, DTE/DB25 male)

� AccelePort 8r-ISA (for 8 ports, DTE/DB25 male)

When DNC2 is used, the DNC2 board and option are needed on the NC.

The option is needed on the NC when the Reader/Puncher is to be used.

(9) Purchase a third-party Ethernet board (when DNC1/Ethernet is used).

The Ethernet board and option are needed on the NC. (The Ethernet

board for the NC is the 10BASE-T interface.)

NOTE

WindowsNT 4.0 does not have a PnP (plug-and-play) function. When

the DNC1 board is to be used, set the PnP function OFF in the BIOS

settings. The method for setting BIOS varies according to the

computer. Refer to the Operator's Manual for your computer.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-26-

2.2 DNC1

The DNC1 board must be installed according to the next procedure.

DNC1 Board Installation

Please insert the DNC1 board into your computer.

For more information about installing the DNC1 board, refer to “D.1 System

Requirements for Installing DNC1 Board”, “D.2 Condition of using DNC1

Driver” and “D.3 Setting DNC1 Board”.

DNC1 Driver Installation

Please install the DNC1 software to your computer with the floppy disk

labeled “DNC1 Driver Disk Setup”.

Refer to “D.4 DNC1 Driver Settings” for details of the software installation.

Testing DNC1 Board

After the completion of the DNC1 board and DNC1 driver installation, please

join the loop-back test connector (A13B-0156-C201) to the terminating

resister unit, start the “Dnc1HardTest” software, and check whether the DNC1

board and software driver are installed correctly or not.

Refer to “D.5 Dnc1HardTest” for details of test.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-27-

2.3 DNC2, READER/PUNCHER

When a computer communicates to NCs with DNC2 or Reader/Puncher, RS-

232-C ports are used.

Setting a RS232C Adapter Board

The RS-232-C adapter boards described in item(8) of “2.1. System

Requirements” can be used.

When using the RS-232-C adapter board, you must install the adapter

according to its manual.

Connecting RS232C Cables

Please prepare the following cables for connecting a computer and an NC

unit.

IIn the case of RS-232-C Adapter Board In the case of standard ports attached to a computer

(Acceleport 4r/8r-ISA DTE � DB25 Male)

Side of PC Side of NC Side of PC Side of NC

DSUB 9pin

����Female����

Signals Pins

SD 3

RD 2

RS 7

CS 8

ER 4

DR 6

CD 1

SG 5

GND

DSUB 25pin

����Male����

Signals Pins

SD 2

RD 3

RS 4

CS 5

ER 20

DR 6

CD 8

SG 7

FG 1

DSUB 25pin

����Female����

Signals Pins

SD 2

RD 3

RS 4

CS 5

ER 20

DR 6

CD 8

SG 7

GND

DSUB 25pin

����Male����

Signals Pins

SD 2

RD 3

RS 4

CS 5

ER 20

DR 6

CD 8

SG 7

FG 1

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-28-

NOTE

1 The shape of the connector in the figure may be different from ones in

your system. Please prepare the RS-232-C cable after checking it with

your own eyes.

2 Don’t use the standard ports attached to your computer when you use

the Reader/Puncher.

3 For details on how to make a connection cable, refer to the FANUC

"RS-232-C/RS-422 Interface Connection Manual (B-60043E)."

4 When an NC machine is controlled with the DNC operation, the DNC

operation may come to a pause for a short time by reason of the

performance of a computer, the less communication buffer of NC, the

heavy work with operating the screen of the computer and so on.

In such a case, please drop the communication speed, or reduce the

number of machines that are controlled with the DNC operation at the

same time.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-29-

2.4 SETTING FA SYSTEM FOR PC

2.4.1 Setting up TCP/IP

FA SYSTEM for PC utilizes the TCP/IP (Transmission Control

Protocol/Internet Protocol) network protocol even if the computer is not

connected with a network. Therefore, the TCP/IP protocol service must be

added to WindowsNT before FA SYSTEM for PC installation.

To know whether TCP/IP is installed in WindowsNT or not, please double-

click the “Network” program in the “Control Panel” group box. The “TCP/IP

Protocol” item can be found in the “Installed Network Software” list box

when WindowsNT contains the TCP/IP protocol.

If TCP/IP protocol isn’t installed, it must be installed by using the “Network”

software of the “Control Panel” group box. Refer to the setup guide of

WindowsNT for the installation.

Normally, the Ethernet board is needed when you install TCP/IP protocol

services. When you install FA SYSTEM for PC on a computer that does not

have an Ethernet board, select “MS Loopback Adapter” provided by

Microsoft as the network adapter, and then install TCP/IP protocol services.

Confirming localhost

“localhost” is a special host name that indicates the self node in TCP/IP

protocol. When WindowsNT is installed, localhost is automatically registered.

However, FA SYSTEM for PC cannot be started normally if this setting is

deleted.

Before you install FA SYSTEM for PC, make sure that localhost is registered

to the hosts file.

The host file will be at the following directory assuming that “c: winnt” is the

directory in which WindowsNT is set up. (The directory in which the

WindowsNT is set up is registered to system setup variable “windir” after

[System] in the [Control Panel] is started.)

“c: winn system32 drivers etc hosts”

NOTE

Setting up TCP/IP in "2.4.1 Setting Up TCP/IP" and installing FA

SYSTEM for PC in "2.4.3 For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC" must be

carried out by a user having administrator privileges.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-30-

Open this file using the Note Pad or other editor, and make cure that the

following line is described in the file. (Normally, this line is located near the

top of the file.)

Add this line if it is not described in the file.

2.4.2 Adding Internet Service

When FA SYSTEM for PC is installed, the FA SYSTEM for PC is

automatically registered to the WindowsNT services file to use its TCP/IP

protocol.

The following table shows the names of services that are automatically

registered.

Table Names of Automatically Registered Services

Name of Service Port No. Protocol

FANUC_PCFA_APP 4096 tcp

FANUC_PCFA_CDA 4097 tcp

FANUC_PCFA_COMM 4098 tcp

FANUC_C4_SERVER 8192 (NOTE) udp

FANUC_C4_API 8193 tcp

If the port No. in the above table is already registered when FA SYSTEM for

PC is registered, check the largest No. in the services file and assign a No.

larger than this No. Conventional services will not be disabled.

As described in note 1 above, you must match the port No. automatically

registered to the services file with the NC parameters. If the port No. in this

table is already in use, an unused port No. is assigned during automatic

registration. So, be sure to check the contents of the services file after you

have installed FA SYSTEM for PC.

127.0.0.1 localhost

NOTE

When DNC1/Ethernet is used, this is the value to enter to “UDP port

No.” in the “ETHPRM” parameter on the NC.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-31-

The services file will be at the following directory assuming that “c: winnt” is

the directory in which directory WindowsNT is set up. (The directory in

which WindowsNT is set up is registered to system setup variable “windir”

after [System] in the [Control Panel] is started.)

“c: winn system32 drivers etc hosts”

When FA SYSTEM for PC is automatically registered to the services file,

back up the file that was active before FA SYSTEM for PC is registered and

save it to the same directory as the services file.

Set the backup file name in the following format based on the time when FA

SYSTEM for PC was automatically registered:

“services.YYYMMDDhhmm”

where,

YYYY: year according to Western calendar

MM: month

DD: day

hh: hours

mm: minutes

2.4.3 For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC

Both FA LIBRARY(A08B-9510-J510) and NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT (A08B-9510-J511) can be installed by the same way.

Please install them by following the next procedure.

1 Log in using a user name having administrator privileges.

2 Insert either “FA LIBRARY Setup Disk (WindowsNT)” or “NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Setup Disk (WindowsNT)” into the

floppy disk drive on your computer.

3 Select [Run] from the Start menu, enter “A: Setup” in the [Name] text

box and press the <OK> button.

4 When the setup program is started, the following screen appears. If

necessary, modify the installation directory of FA SYSTEM for PC, and

click the <Continue> button.

NOTE

You must restart your computer if you have changed the port No. in the

service file after FA SYSTEM for PC has been installed.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-32-

5 The following disk information screen will appear. Confirm that the disk

space of [Space Available] is lager than one of [Space Required], and

click the <Setup> button.

If [Space Available] is not enough, click the <Cancel> button and stop

the installation. Try to install into the other disk with enough space.

6 When the <Setup> button is clicked, the installation is progressing

automatically. Change the next floppy disk according to the message.

7 When the installation is complete, the message “Setup was succeeded”

will appear in the computer display and the [FANUC FA System for PC]

group dialog is created as follows.

8 The ReadMe.txt file is displayed

The ReadMe.txt file is copied to the directory in which FA SYSTEM for

PC is installed.

NOTE

Be sure to read the ReadMe.txt file. This file contains new functions

and precautions added after this Operator's Manual was issued.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-33-

When NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is installed, the FANUC FA System

for PC group dialog and its programs are created as follows.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

When FA LIBRARY is installed, the [FANUC FA System for PC] group

dialog and its programs are created as follows.

(1) (2) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(1) This is the startup icon for FA SYSTEM for PC. FA SYSTEM for PC

communicates with the NC by starting the communication process from

this icon.

Refer to “2.5. Starting and Stopping the Communication Process” for the

way of operation.

(2) This is the Machine Configuration program. Refer to “2.6. System

Configuration” for the way of operation.

(3) This is the NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT program.

Refer to Chapter 3 “NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT” for the way of

operation.

(4) This is the Select Transfer File program.

Refer to Chapter 3 “NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT” for the way of

operation.

(5) This is the Edit List File screen. Refer to “6.1 Edit List File Screen

Operations” for the way of operation.

(6) This is the List File Monitor screen. Refer to “6.2 List File Monitor

Screen Operations” for the way of operation.

(7) This is the Log Viewer program.

Refer to Chapter 5 “Observation of FA SYSTEM for PC” for the way of

operation.

(8) This is the FA LIBRARY sample program for developing applications in

Visual C++.

Refer to Chapter 4 “FA LIBRARY” for an explanation.

(9) This is the FA LIBRARY sample program for developing applications in

Visual Basic.

Refer to Chapter 4 “FA LIBRARY” for an explanation.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-34-

2.5 STARTING AND STOPPING THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS

Starting the Communication Process

1 Double-click [FA System] in the [FANUC FA System for PC] group

dialog.

2 The communication process is started in the state of an icon, and the

[FANUC FA System for PC] icon appears at the lower-left corner on the

computer display.

Stopping the Communication Process

1 Double-click the running [FANUC FA System for PC] icon which is

started by the above operation. The following screen will appear.

2 Click the[Exit] of the menu. The communication process will be stopped.

NOTE

If you execute "Start Communication Process" when no machines

have been set in the Machine Setup screen, the error (0x1004011d)

will occur.

Before you start the communication process, execute the system

configuration described in "2.6 System Configuration" and set the

currently connected machine.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-35-

2.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

To use FA SYSTEM for PC, you must give a distinctive information to each

machine.

By using the Machine Configuration screen, please set up the information

such as a machine number, a machine name, a device port and communication

protocol for connecting to the computer, and the way to manage NC

programs.

Make sure that stop the communication process before the Machine

Configuration screen is started.

Double-click [Machine Configuration] in the [FA System for PC] group

dialog. The Machine Configuration screen is shown.

When you have set the system configuration for the first time or when you

have changed the system configuration settings, save the new settings to

floppy disk according to the description in “2.6.6 Saving and Restoring

Settings.”

2.6.1 Machine Information Settings

1 Select the [Machine Information] panel in the [Machine Configuration]

dialog box.

2 Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list

box.

3 Enter the name you want to give into the [Machine Name ] text box.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-36-

4 Select the NC type from the [ Kind of Machine] list box according to the

NC machine.

If the type of NC you are using is not displayed, select “OTHERS”.

5 Click the <Save> button.

2.6.2 General Settings for Machine

Selecting the Default directory

1 Select the [General] panel in�Machine Configuration�dialog box.

2 Select the machine number you want to setup from the [ Machine] list

box.

3 Setup the following parameters in the [General] panel.

� Switch on “Normal Mode” from the [NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT Style] group box.

� Click the button in the right side of the [Default Directory]

directory box. The file list will appear. Select the directory you

want to use from this file list.

� Enter the extension you want to give in the [Default Extension] text

box.

4 Click the <Save> button.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-37-

Setting the Subprogram Extension and List File Extension

1 Select the [General] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box.

2 Select the machine number you want to set up from the [Machine] list

box.

3 Set up the following parameters in the [General] panel.

� Enter the extension used for the subprogram in the [Subprogram

Extension] text box. Normally, set the same extension as the default

extension.

� Enter the extension used for the List File in the [List File Extension]

text box. Enter a extension different to that used for the default

extension and subprogram extension. If the List File extension

matches either the default extension or subprogram extension, an

error will occur when you try to save the File List.

4 Click the <Save> button.

NOTE

The subprogram extension and List File extension can be set only

when the Reader/Puncher interface protocol is used.

Do not change this value when other protocols are used.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-38-

2.6.3 Communication Settings for Machine

DNC1 Settings

1 Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog

box.

2 Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list

box..

3 Select “DNC1” from the [Protocol] list box.

4 Press the <Set Default> button and set the default.

When you communicate with the NC using this default, first check that

the NC parameters are at the value described in “A.1 Sample of NC

Parameter Settings.” If communication is carried out using a value

different from the settings in this Appendix, the set values in this screen

must be made to match the values currently set in the NC parameters.

� Baud Rate: 460.8K

5 Using the <Set Default> button set the value that is not set. Set the

[Settings] group box as follows:

� Select “1” from the [DNC1 Board Number] list box.

� Select the node number form the [Node Number] list box. The

selected number must be correspond to the DNC1 address

parameter specified in the NC machine.

6 The [Transfer Tool Offset] group box is automatically set according to

the NC type set in the [Machine Type] list box in the [Machine

Information] panel.

Set as follows when “OTHERS” is selected in the [Machine Type] list

box when a new machine type is used:

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-39-

� To transfer the tool offsets, select either of “Milling system” or

“Turning system” matched to the machine from the [Tool Offset

Type] list box.

� To transfer PMC data, select one of “Type FS15B/16/18”, “Type

FS15A” or “Type FS0” matched to the machine from the [PMC

Address Specification Form] list box.

With DNC1, the PMC address specification format varies according

to the type of NC. This setting, however, allows you to specify the

PCM address by the same format regardless of the type of NC when

you are accessing PMC data from FA LIBRARY.

� To transfer the NC parameters, select either of “2” or “3” matched

to the machine from the [Bit Type Data Type] list box.

7 Click the <Save> button.

DNC2 Settings

1 Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog

box.

2 Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list

box.

3 Select “DNC2” from the [Protocol] list box.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-40-

4 Press the <Set Default> button and set the default.

When you communicate with the NC using this default, first check that

the NC parameters are at the value described in “A.1 Sample of NC

Parameter Settings.” If communication is carried out using a value

different from the settings in this Appendix, the set values in this screen

must be made to match the values currently set in the NC parameters.

� Baud Rate : 9600 (bps)

� Data Length : 7 (bits)

� Data Code : ASCII

� Parity : EVEN

� Stop Bit : 2 (bits)

� Retry : 5 (times)

� NAK Retry : 3 (times)

� Datagram Length : 256 (characters)

� Time Out : 5 (seconds)

� EOT Time Out : 5 (seconds)

5 In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set

Default> button.

� [For Details] does not need to be specified.

� Select the RS-232-C port number from the [Port] list box.

6 The [Transfer Tool Offset] group box is automatically set according to

the NC type set in the [Machine Type] list box in the [Machine

Information] panel.

Set as follows when “OTHERS” is selected in the [Machine Type] list

box when a new machine type is used:

� To transfer the tool offsets, select either of “Milling system” or

“Turning system” matched to the machine from the [Tool Offset

Type] list box.

� To transfer PMC data, select one of “Type FS15B/16/18”, “Type

FS15A” or “Type FS0” matched to the machine from the [PMC

Address Specification Form] list box.

With DNC1, the PMC address specification format varies according

to the type of NC. This setting, however, allows you to specify the

PCM address by the same format regardless of the type of NC when

you are accessing PMC data from FA LIBRARY.

� To transfer the NC parameters, select either of “2” or “3” matched

to the machine from the [Bit Type Data Type] list box.

7 Click the <Save> button.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-41-

Settings of Reader/Puncher

1 Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog

box.

2 Select the machine number you want to setup from the [Machine] list

box.

3 Select “Reader/Puncher” from the [Protocol] list box.

4 Press the <Set Default> button and set the default.

When you communicate with the NC using this default, first check that

the NC parameters are at the value described in “A. Sample of NC

Parameter Settings.” If communication is carried out using a value

different from the settings in this Appendix, the set values in this screen

must be made to match the values currently set in the NC parameters.

� Baud Rate : 9600 (bps)

� Data Length : 8 (bits)

� Data Code : ISO

� Parity : NONE

� Stop Bit : 2 (bits)

� TV Check : Checked “X”

� Send DC2 and DC4 : Checked “X”

� Send ER(%) at the head and the end : Checked “X”

5 In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set

Default> button.

� [For Details] does not need to be specified.

� Select the RS-232C port number from the [Port] list box.

6 Select the <Save> button.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-42-

Settings of DNC1/Ethernet

1 Select the [Communication] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog

box.

2 Select the machine number you want to set up from the [Machine] list

box.

3 Select "DNC1/Ethernet" from the [Protocol] list box.

4 Press the <Set Default> button and set the default.

The following value is set:

� C4 server IP address : 127.0.0.1

5 In the [Settings] group box, set the value that is not set using the <Set

Default> button.

� [For Details] does not need to be specified.

� Enter the IP address” set to the NC to be connected in the [NC IP

Address] text box.

� Enter the “TCP Port No.” set in the NC to be connected in the [NC

TCP Port No.] text box.

6 Click the <Save> button.

NOTE

Do not change this value.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-43-

2.6.4 Download Settings for Machine

You can set the subprogram transfer method and List File transfer method.

For details on the subprogram transfer function, see “1.5 Subprogram

Transfer Function,” and for details on the List File transfer function, see “1.6

List File Transfer Function.”

2 If you select either of “Separate Transfer” or “Extended Transfer” in the

[Transfer Styles for Sub Programs] frame, you can set the following:

� Calling Type

You can set the code used for calling the subprogram.

You can set a combination of the M98, G65 and G66 codes.

� Masks of Sub Programs

You can set the subprograms not to transfer even if a subprogram is

called by the main program. You can set this in 1000-line units. So,

for example, you can set “Not to send subprograms in lines 8000 to

9000 as they are stored in NC memory.”

NOTE

You can set the subprogram transfer method and List File transfer

method only when the Reader/Puncher interface protocol is used. Do

not change this value when other protocols are used.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-44-

� 1st to 3rd Directory Searching Sub Program

You can set up to three directories for storing the subprograms. 1 to

3 indicate the search order. That is, when a subprogram having the

same number is located in [1st Directory Searching Sub Program]

and [2nd Directory Searching Sub Program], the subprogram in [1st

Directory Searching Sub Program] is transferred.

Setting the List File Transfer Method

1 Select the [Download] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box.

2 Select either of “Separate Transfer” or “Extended Transfer” in the

[Transfer Styles for NC Programs Registered in List File] frame.

3 If you have selected “Extended Transfer”, also set [Wait for send buffer

to reach 0 before proceeding to next record in extended transfer mode].

2.6.5 Upload Settings for Machine

1 Select the [Upload] panel in the [Machine Configuration] dialog box.

These settings are not used now but are provided for the future.

Setup as the following figure.

NOTE

The subprogram is searched for only from the directories set at [1st to

3rd Directory Searching Sub Program]. Subprograms will not be

searched for even if [Default Directory] is set unless you set [1st to 3rd

Directory Searching Sub Program].

WARNING

If invalid settings are specified, the FA SYSTEM for PC might behave

unexpectedly.

B-75044EN/02 2. SETUP

-45-

2.6.6 Saving and Restoring Settings

The FA SYSTEM for PC settings that are set in the Machine Setup screen are

written to a data file on your computer by pressing the <Save> button.

The installation floppy disk holds the FA SYSTEM for PC communication

program and various operation screens. Even if your computer crashes, you

can install FA SYSTEM for PC again once your computer is repaired.

However, there is no means for restoring FA SYSTEM for PC settings that

are set in the Machine Setup screen when your computer crashes.

You can save FA SYSTEM for PC settings to floppy disk in case you

computer crashes. You can also restore FA SYSTEM for PC settings. If you

have changed the settings, be sure to save the new settings to floppy disk.

Select the <Save> button in the Machine Setup screen. The following [Save

and Restore Setting] dialog box appears.

2. SETUP B-75044EN/02

-46-

Select the <Return> button to return to the Machine Setup screen.

Saving Settings

1 Insert the floppy disk that you want to save the settings to into the floppy

disk drive. Before you insert the floppy disk, make sure that it is not

write-protected.

2 The “Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive.” message box appears.

Select the <OK> button.

3 The save status is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Saving and restoring of settings are carried out not for each machine that is set

but for all machine settings.

Restoring Settings

1 Insert the floppy disk that you made by saving data into the floppy disk

drive.

2 The “Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive.” message box appears.

Select the <OK> button.

3 The restore status is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Formatting the Floppy Disk

1 Insert the floppy disk that you want to format into the floppy disk drive.

Before you insert the floppy disk, make sure that it is not write-protected.

2 The “Insert the floppy disk into the A: drive.” message box appears.

Select the <OK> button.

3 The window for formatting appears. Press the <Start> button.

NOTE

Before you save the settings to 3.5" floppy disk, do not forget to press

the <Save> button in the Machine Setup screen to write the settings to

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-47-

3 NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-48-

3.1 OUTLINE

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is the software package that allows a

computer to function as an NC program file sever to connect multiple NCs.

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT has the following functions according to

the communicating capability.

(1) For DNC1 or DNC2

The following functions can be executed from the menu of NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.

� A computer can download an NC program to NC.

� A computer can upload an NC program from NC.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can show the list of NC

programs stored in the NC memory.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete an NC program

stored in NC.

The following functions can be executed by operating CRT/MDI of NC.

� An NC machine can read an NC program from a computer.

� An NC machine can punch a NC program to a computer.

� NC can call an NC program for DNC operation.

(2) For DNC1/Ethernet

The following functions can be executed from the menu of NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.

� A computer can download an NC program to the NC memory.

� A computer can upload an NC program from the NC memory.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can show the list of NC

programs stored in the NC memory.

� NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT can delete an NC program

stored in an NC.

(3) For Reader/Puncher

The following functions can be executed by operating on CRT/MDI of

NC

� An NC machine can read an NC program from a computer.

� An NC machine can punch a NC program to a computer.

� An NC machine can show the list of NC programs stored in a

computer.

� An NC machine can delete a NC program stored in a computer.

� An NC machine can call an NC program for DNC operation.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-49-

3.2 USING NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

Double-click [NC Program Management] in the [FA System for PC] group

dialog. The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen will appear.

3.2.1 About The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Window

The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT screen looks like this:

Menu Bar

Tool Bar Current Management Group Bar

Slider

File List

Scroll Bar

Split Bar Status Bar

Management Group List

Management Group List

The Management Group List looks on left side of the screen. The list of the

management groups is shown in this screen. The list consists of the Machine

List and the Directory List .

(1) Machine List

The Machine List indicates the machines that can be used by NC

PROGRAM MANAGEMENT. When a machine is double-clicked in the

list, the contents of the default-directory assigned to the machine appears

at the File List on the right.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-50-

(2) Directory List

The list indicates work directories.

The work directory is the directory of WindowsNT. When a directory is

registered as the work directory in the NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT screen, a file can be transferred between the default-

directory and the other directory without handling the File Manager of

WindowsNT.

File List

The File List looks on right side of the screen. The list displays the list of files

in the Current Management Group.

Current Management Group Bar

The Current Management Group Bar indicates the information of Current

Management Group such as the machine name, the path of default-directory,

and the work directory.

Status Bar

The Status Bar indicates the total number of the files in the Current

Management Group. The bar shows the message that the job is in progress

when it takes a short time to deal with the job, such as the Current

Management screen is refreshed.

Scroll Bar

You can scroll through the hidden part of the Management Group List and

File List by clicking the Scroll Bar.

Slider

The slider is used to turn pages in the File List. When the total number of files

in Current Management Group exceeds the maximum number of files that can

be displayed in one page of the File List, the remaining files appear in the

following pages.

Any value within the range 100 to 5000 can be set in the Options screen as the

maximum number of files that can be displayed in one page of the File List.

Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains the commands for handling NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT.

Tool Bar

The Tool Bar contains the shortcut buttons providing quick access to the often

utilized commands .

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-51-

Split Bar

The split bar separates the Management Group List and File List.

You can move to change the width of the lists by using the mouse to point to

the bar and dragging it to its new position.

3.2.2 Work with the File List

Changing the Current Management Group

1 When you first start the NC PROGRAM MANAGE-MENT screen, only

the Machine List and Directory List are displayed in the Management

Group List.

Click the sign(+) on the left side of the lists. The list is expanded and the

name of the sub-directories are displayed like the structure of a tree.

2 Double-click the expanded sub-directory you want to select. The Current

Management Group is refreshed, and the contents of the File List is

shown.

� You can choose the Current Management Group from the list box

on the left side of the tool bar.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-52-

Changing the View Form of the File List

- To display large icons of files, choose the [Large Icons] from the [View]

menu, or click the [Large Icons] button on the tool bar.

- To display only names of files, click the [List] command from the [View]

menu, or click the [List] button on the tool bar.

- To display complete information about each file, click the [Details]

command from the [View] menu, or click the [Details] button on the tool

bar.

Sorting the Contents of the File List

- To sort files alphabetically by name, choose the [by Name] command

from the [Arrange Icons] of [View] menu.

- To sort files by type, choose the [Sort by Type] command from the

[Arrange Icons] of [View] menu.

- To sort files by size, choose the [Sort by Size] command from the

[Arrange Icons] of [View] menu.

- To sort files by date, choose the [Sort by Date] command from the

[Arrange Icons] of [View] menu.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-53-

� When complete information of files are displayed, you can sort files

by clicking one of the [Name], [Type], [Size], [Last modification

date] column in the top of the File List.

Refreshing the File List

1 Choose the [Refresh] command from the [View] menu. The File List is

updated.

NOTE

1 When you operate CRT/MDI of NC and the NC program is uploaded to

the directory which is now shown in the File List of NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT, the File List isn’t updated. In this case, refresh the list

by using this command.

2 When an NC program is uploaded by using the menu explained later in

“3.2.5. Transmitting an NC Program”, the list is updated automatically,

and you don’t need to do this command.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-54-

3.2.3 Work with the Directory List

Adding a Work Directory to the Directory List

1 Choose the [Add Directory] command from the [Directory] of [File]

menu. The [Add Directory] dialog box will open.

2 Double-click the directory you want to add to the work directory, and

click the <OK> button.

Up to ten directories can be added to the Directory List.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-55-

Freeing the Work Directory from the Directory List

1 Click the work directory you want to cancel in the Directory List of the

Management Group List

2 Choose the [Free Directory] command from the [Directory] of [File]

menu.

Replacing a Work Directory with the New One

1 Choose the work directory you want to replace from the Directory List of

the Management Group List.

2 And choose the [Change Directory] command from the [Directory] of

[File] menu. The [Change Directory] dialog box will open.

3 Double-click the directory you want to use, and click the <OK> button.

� The [Change Directory] command is equal to the operation

combined the [Free Directory] with the [Add Directory].

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-56-

3.2.4 Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files

Copying Files

1 Choose the file you want to copy from the File List.

You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl

key

2 Click the [Copy] command in the [File] menu. The [Copy File] dialog

box will open.

3 Choose the Management Group of destination, and click the <Copy>

button.

Copying

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-57-

Moving Files

1 Choose the file you want to move from the File List.

You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl

key.

2 Click the [Move] command in the [File] menu. The [Move File] dialog

box will open.

3 Choose the Management Group of destination, and click the <Move>

button.

Deleting Files

1 Choose the file you want to delete from the File List.

You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl

key.

2 Click the [Delete] command in the [File] menu.

Renaming the file

1 Choose the file you want to rename from the File List.

2 Click the [Rename] command in the [File] menu. The [Rename File]

dialog box will open.

3 Enter a new name of the file, and click the <Change> button.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-58-

3.2.5 Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files

Browsing Files

1 Choose the file you want to browse in the File List.

2 Click the [Browse] command in the [File] menu to start the viewer for

the file you selected.

� When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List screen is

started. Refer to 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT for details of

operations in the Edit File List screen.

� When the file is selected outside of the File List, the File Viewer

integrated in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is started.

To exit the File Viewer, click [Exit] in the menu.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-59-

Editing Files

1 Choose the file you want to edit in the File List.

2 Click the [Edit] command in the [File] menu to start the editor for the file

you selected.

� When the file is selected in the File List, the Edit File List screen is

started. Refer to 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT for details of

operations in the Edit File List screen.

� When the file is selected outside of the File List, the editor set in the

[Options] dialog box is started. The editor provided with WindowsNT is

set as the default.

NOTE

1 File Viewer allows you to view only one file at once.

If you browse another file while you are browsing the current file, the

File Viewer displays the contents of the newly selected file.

2 File Viewer is a text viewer. It does not allow you to view binary files.

3 The largest file size that File Viewer allows you to view is 32 Kbytes.

When you browse files exceeding this size limit, only the first 32

Kbytes of the file are displayed.

4 You can also specify third-party viewer software in the [Options] dialog

box. Refer to "3.2.8 Setting Options" for details.

NOTE

1 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in the [Options] dialog

box, the [Edit] menu is not displayed.

2 Files in work directory cannot be edited.

3 The File List display in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is not

automatically updated by saving changes made to files using the

editor. Refresh the File List by the method described in "3.2.2 File List

Operations."

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-60-

Creating New Files

1 Double-click the directory in which you want to create the file to display

the File List.

2 Point at the [New] command in the [File] menu. File types that can be

created are displayed. Click the desired file type.

� When the file is selected in the File List, the editor that you specified in

the Options menu is displayed. Use this editor for creating NC programs

or subprogram.

NOTE

1 If you have selected the "Disable Editor" option in the Options menu,

the [New File] menu is not displayed.

2 Files cannot be created in the work directory.

3 The File List display in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is not

automatically updated by saving changes made to files using the

editor. Refresh the File List by the method described in "3.2.2 File List

Operations."

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-61-

� When the file is selected outside of the File List, the Edit File List screen

is started. Use this screen for creating the File List.

Refer to 6. FILE LIST MANAGEMENT for details of operations in the

Edit File List screen.

3.2.6 Transmitting an NC Program

Displaying the List of NC Programs in the Memory of NC

1 Click the machine you want to access from the Machine List. The

Current Management Group is changed, and the File List is updated to

the contents of the default-directory assigned to the selected machine.

2 Click the [Start Communication] command the [communication] menu.

3 The File List is split in upper and lower area. The File List of the NC

memory is displayed in the bottom half, and the File List of the Current

Management Group is displayed in the top half.

NOTE

1 To transmit an NC program, the communication process must be run.

2 To transmit an NC program by operating the NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT screen, the computer must be connected to NC by

either of DNC1, DNC2 or DNC1/Ethernet.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-62-

NC programs stored in the NC memory of “Machine02” are shown.

� When the [File List] command of the [Communication] menu is

clicked, the File List of the NC memory is updated.

4 Choose the [End of communication] command from the

[Communication] menu, the following dialog box is shown.

5 If the <Yes> button is clicked, the communication of the machine is

closed, and the File List of the NC memory disappears.

If the <No> button is clicked, the communication of the machine is left

open, and only the File List of the NC memory disappears.

If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the [End of communication] command

is canceled and the screen is returned to the state of the above item 3.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-63-

Downloading an NC Program

1 Select the file you want to download from the File List in the Current

Management Group. You can select more than one file by clicking files

while pushing the Ctrl key.

2 Click the [Download] command of the [communication] menu.

3 The [Downloading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the

[Download] button.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-64-

4 The selected NC programs are downloaded to NC, and the File List of

NC memory is updated automatically.

Uploading a NC Program

1 Select the file you want to upload from the File List of the NC memory.

You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl

key.

2 Click the [Upload] command of the [communication] menu.

3 The [Uploading NC Program] dialog box appears. Click the [Upload]

button.

4 The selected NC programs are uploaded from the NC to the computer,

and the File List in the Current Management Group is updated

automatically.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-65-

Deleting the NC Program in the Memory of a NC

1 Select the file you want to delete from the File List of the NC memory.

You can select more than one file by clicking files while pushing the Ctrl

key.

2 Click the [Delete] command of the [communication] menu, the [Delete

NC Program] dialog will open.

3 If the <Delete> button is clicked, the selected NC program is deleted

from the NC memory.

If the <Cancel> button is clicked, the deletion is canceled.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-66-

Switching Path Control Systems

You can communicate with multiple paths CNC systems by checking the

[Connect to multiple paths CNC] check box in the [Options] dialog box.

1 Point at the [Change Path] command in the [Communication] menu. This

displays a list of available systems. Choose the desired system you want

to switch to.

2 The screen displays a list of files in the NC memory of the system you

switched over to. All [Communication] commands from here on are

executed on all selected NC systems.

3.2.7 Selecting the NC Program on the PC

When the NC unit doesn’t support the Input/Output device that can be

connected to FLOPPY CASSETTE or HANDY FILE, the file to be

downloaded can’t be selected from the list of the computer by operating the

NC side.

In case NC has the Input/Output device for only the tape reader or FANUC

PPR, the file to be downloaded is selected by operating the menu of a

computer at first. And then it can be downloaded by operating the NC side.

This function is effective toward the NC which can’t select the NC program

stored in a remote device.

Currently selected Path

NOTE

Up to two path control systems are supported.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-67-

Selecting the Transfer File

1 Select the file you want to download from the File List.

2 Choose the [Select Transfer File] command from the [File] menu. The

[Select Transfer File] dialog box and [Change Transfer File] dialog box

will open.

3 Confirm that the directory specified by the above item 1 is shown in the

[File Name] text box of the [Change Transfer File] dialog box, and click

the [Setting] button. Please keep “1” in the [Line No.] text box and “0” in

the [Sequence No.] text box.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-68-

4 Confirm that the directory specified by the above item 3 is shown in the

[File] label of the [ The Current Selecting File] group list of the [Select

Transfer File] dialog box. And click the <OK> button.

5 The above selected file is downloaded when you request to download an

NC program without specifying the NC program number in the NC side.

Clearing the Transfer File

1 Choose the [Select Transfer File] command from the [File] menu. The

[Select Transfer File] dialog box will open.

2 Click the <Change> button in the [Select Transfer File] dialog box.

The [Change Transfer File] dialog box will open.

3 Clean up the contents of the [File Name] text box by using the Backspace

key, and click the < Setting> button.

B-75044EN/02 3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

-69-

This space is cleared by the Backspace key

4 Confirm that the contents of the [File] label of the [The Current Selecting

File] group list in the [Select Transfer File] dialog box is clear. And click

the <OK> button.

5 The [Selecting the Transfer File] function is canceled.

If you attempt to download an NC program without specifying the NC

program number, any NC program isn’t downloaded, and the computer

notifies the error to the NC by resetting the communication.

The [Select Transfer File] screen can be started too by double-clicking the

[Select Transfer File] icon of the [FA System for PC] group instead of the

above operation.

3.2.8 Setting Options

1 Click the [Options] command in the [Tools] menu. The [Options] dialog

box will open.

3. NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-70-

2 In the [File List] frame, make settings relating to File List display on

your computer.

� When the [Reflesh File List before sorting] check box is checked,

the latest file list information is acquired before the File List display

order is changed.

If this check box is not checked, the File List display order is

changed based on the details currently displayed in the File List.

NOTE, however, that if the File List has several pages of data, the

latest file list information is acquired before the File List display

order is changed regardless of the setting of this check box.

� If the [Do not display confirmation message when switching pages]

check box is checked, the confirmation dialog box will not be

displayed when you switch pages in the File List.

� If you change the value of the [Maximum number of displayable

files in File List] check box, you can change the number of files that

can be displayed in one page of the File List.

3 In the [Browse File] frame, make settings relating to file browsing.

� If you select the [Disable External Viewer] option, the File Viewer

integrated in NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is used.

� If you select the [Enable External Viewer] option, you can specify

third-party viewer software. Enter the command for starting the

editor in the [Editor start command] box.

4 In the [Edit File] fame, make settings relating to file editing.

� If you select the [Disable Editor] option, you can no longer edit files

or create new files.

� If you select the [Enable Editor] option, you can edit files or create

new files using the specified editor. Enter the command for starting

the editor in the [Editor start command] box.

NOTE, however, that the [Edit File List] screen is used for editing

the File List.

5 In the [Communication] frame, make setting relating to communication

with the NC.

� If the [Connect to multiple paths CNC] check box is checked, you

can specify the NC system with which you are to communicate.

If this check box is not checked, communication is carried out with

only the 1st of the multiple connected NC systems. Communication

with other NC systems is not possible.

6 Click the <OK> button to enable the new settings.

To cancel setting midway and restore the original values, click the

<Cancel> button.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-71-

4 FA LIBRARY

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-72-

4.1 OUTLINE

This chapter describes the user interface of the functions supported by FA

LIBRARY of FA SYSTEM for PC.

4.1.1 Service Type

FA LIBRARY is composed of “System service”, “Request service”, and

“Diagnosis and other services”.

“System service” is the function group for handling the system such as the

start and end of the communication process.

“Request service” is the function group for handling NC such as the download

of an NC program. All functions for “System service” are processed

synchronously. But for “Request service”, two types of functions are

provided; synchronous functions and asynchronous functions.

An asynchronous and a synchronous functions are different in the timing when

the called function returns the control to an application program.

A synchronous function waits until FA SYSTEM for PC finishes the request,

and returns its result.

Though, an asynchronous function sends a request and returns the control to

an application program at once without waiting for the result. The result can

be checked by the other function.

For example, the F_DownloadFileNumber function, which downloads an

NC program, doesn’t return until the download is finished (synchronous

treatment).

The F_DownloadFileNumberEx function requests the system to

download an NC program, and returns at once. The return value is the

descriptor ID which can be used to get the result.

When an application program calls the F_Response function with the

descriptor ID as an argument, it can be confirmed whether the download is

finished. And if so, the result indicates that the download was successful or

not.

If an asynchronous function is used, one application program can handle more

than one service at the same time because each asynchronous function doesn’t

wait for the result.

When you use “System service” or “Request service”, you must judge the

result. In such case, there are some useful functions like F_Response in the

function group of “Diagnosis and other services”.

For details on the log library, refer to "4.5 Log Library."

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-73-

4.1.2 How to Read the Library Function

The functions are classified according to the service group explained in “4.2

System service”, “4.3 Request service”, and “4.4 Diagnosis and other

services” and “4.5 Log Service”.

As for “System service”, the most application program can be satisfied with

the functions of only Clause 4.2.

Almost all application specifications can be satisfied by only the functions of

clauses 4.2.1 and 4.2.2. Refer to clauses 4.2.3 to 4.2.12 if necessary.

As for “Request service”, refer to the function in accordance with the

specification of your application.

For details on “Diagnostics and Other Services”, be sure to read about the

functions in clauses 4.4.1, 4.4.6 and 4.4.7. Refer to other clauses if necessary

when these functions appear in the explanation of the function you use.

Every function is explained by the items of SYNOPSIS, DESCRIPTION, and

RETURN VALUE.

SYNOPSIS describes the calling form of function. In case of VC++, F_ is

given to the top of the function name. F_ isn’t stuck to the function for VB.

The contents of DESCRIPTION and RETURN VALUE are common with the

function for VB and VC++.

When you develop the application program with VB, regard the function

name described in explanation as the name without F_.

Some functions have the argument of the tool post number.

In case of the multipath NC which has several tool posts, the tool post number

indicates which tool post should comply with the request .

As for DNC2, be sure to set up the value of “0” because the tool post number

can’t be used.

As for DNC1 or DNC1/Ethernet, set the value of “1” in case of the first tool

post. And set “2” in case of the second tool post.

All functions of FA LIBRARY can be used for the NC connected with DNC1,

DNC2 and DNC1/Ethernet, except for a special mention.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-74-

4.1.3 About the Development Language of the Application Program

The functions can be called from both of Microsoft Visual Basic Ver4.0(VB)

and Microsoft Visual C++ Ver4.0(VC++). (For details on VB and VC++

versions, refer to "2.1 Computer Operating Environment.")

In case of Visual Basic

In case of VB, the user interface is provided with “OLE Automation”. So,

“Object” is created by the CreateObject() function, and the service can be

requested by calling “Method” of “Object”. “FanucCom.Library” must be

specified when “Object” is created by CreateObject().

Dim Obj As Object

Dim Rtn As Boolean

Set Obj = CreateObject(“FanucCom.Library”)

Rtn = Obj.Begin

Rtn = Obj.CreateCommunication

When FA LIBRARY is installed, “FanucCom.Library” is registered

automatically to “Registry” in WindowsNT as “OLE Automation”.

In case of VC++

In case of C++, the user interface is provided with “DLL”. “Class” of C++ is

not used for user interface. Therefore, each function is called directly.

BOOL Rtn;

Rtn = F_Begin();

Rtn = F_CreateCommunication();

In case of the library for C++, F_ is stuck to the top of a function name. This

character indicates that the function is provided by FANUC.

When you make an application program, the following files are used.

� The file which must be included while an application program is

compiled.

INCLUDE FComLib.h

� The library modules which must be combined while an application

program is linked

LIB FComLib.lib (for release)

LIB FComLibD.lib (for debug)

LIB LogLib.lib (for release)

LIB LogLibD.lib (for debug)

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-75-

� The DLL files which are referred while an application program is

running

BIN FComLib.dll (for release)

BIN FComLibD.dll (for debug)

BIN LogLib.dll (for release)

BIN LogLibD.dll (for debug)

The above relative directories are continued from the directory where FA

LIBRARY is installed.

When an application program is compiled by using VC++, both of a debug

and a release version module are created.

The debug version module includes the debug information; the memory

utilization, the records of tracing the control and so on. The release version

module doesn’t include these information.

To develop an application program, debug the program in a debug version at

first, and then check it with a release version. Though the program must be

checked for both of a debug and a release version, these two processes make

the quality program, and these efforts should be resulted in efficiency.

By reason of VC++ descriptions, if a program is consisted of a debug and a

release version modules, it doesn’t work correctly.

FA LIBRARY provides two modules; the debug and the release versions.

When you develop the application with a debug version, please use the

debug version library . And use the release version library when you make up

an application program of a release version.

4.1.4 About Starting Applications You Have Developed

Pay attention to the following when starting applications made using this

library. Let's assume that the application made by the user is named

“YourApp.exe” and that the directory in which FA SYSTEM for PC is “C:

FpFaSys”.

In case of Visual Basic

“YourApp.exe” starts whichever directory it is on.

In case of Visual C++

Place “YourApp.exe” in “C: FpFaSys”. If you place it in a different

directory, add the path for pointing C: FpFaSys Bin to the system variable

“PATH”. To set system variable “PATH” by starting [System] in the [Control

Panel] and set in [Setup]. The library for VC++ is DLL, and these are stored

to “C: FpFaSys Bin”. So, that location must be set to the OS.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-76-

4.1.5 About Sample Program

Sample programs are appended in the package of FA LIBRARY. These

sample programs are made up of the FA LIBRARY functions described in

Section 4.2 to 4.5.

Files and Directories

There are two sample programs made by using VC++(version 4.0) and VB

(version 4.0).

The two sample programs have the same operation and menu layout.

The executable and the source files of the two programs are placed in the

following directories.

Type of program executable file source file

VC++ BIN FComTst.exe SAMPLE FComTst *.*

VB BIN FComTVB.exe SAMPLE FComTVB *.*

The above relative directories are continued from the directory where FA

LIBRARY is installed.

The following table shows the compatibility between FA LIBRARY functions

and each communication protocol, and a list of sample files used by these

functions.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-77-

Relationship between the functions of FA LIBRARY and the sample program files

Communication Protocol

CompatibilityFunction

DNC1 DNC2DNC1/

EthernetVB VC++

4.2.1. Start of Communication Process � � � frmCreateComm.frm fCreateManager.cpp

4.2.2. End of Communication Process � � � frmTerminateComm.frm fTerminateManager.cpp

4.2.3. Start of Communication � � � frmOpen.frm fOpen.cpp

4.2.4.Stop of Communication � � � frmClose.frm fClose.cpp

4.2.5. Confirmation of Communication � � � frmIsOpen.frm fIsOpen.cpp

4.2.6. Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers � � � frmMachineList.frm fMachineNumber.cpp

4.2.7. Getting of List of Communicating Machines � � � frmMachineList.frm fMachineNumber.cpp

4.2.12. Getting Information about Machine � � � frmMachineInfo.frm fMachineInfo.cpp

4.3.1. Downloading NC Program requested by

Computer

� � � frmDownload.frm fDownload.cpp

4.3.2. Uploading NC Program requested by

Computer

� � � frmUpload.frm fUpload.cpp

4.3.3. External Reset � � � frmReset.frm fReset.cpp

4.3.4. Cycle Start � � ∆ frmStart.frm fStart.cpp

4.3.5. Selecting NC Program in NC � � ∆ frmSelect.frm fSelect.cpp

4.3.6. Deleting NC Program in NC � � � frmDelete.frm fDelete.cpp

4.3.7. Reading NC Identification � � � frmIdentify.frm fIdentify.cpp

4.3.8. Reading List of NC Programs in NC � � � frmDirectory.frm fDirectory.cpp

4.3.9. Establishing DNC1 Connection � - - frmEstablishDnc1.frm fEstablishDnc1.cpp

4.3.10. Confirmation of DNC1 Connection � - - frmConfirmDnc1.frm fConfirmDnc1.cpp

4.3.11. Reading Alarm Information � � � frmAlarm.frm fAlarm.cpp

4.3.12. Reading Tool Offset � � � frmReadToolOffset.frm fReadToolOffset.cpp

4.3.13. Writing Tool Offset � � � frmWriteToolOffset.frm fWriteToolOffset.cpp

4.3.14. Reading Custom Macro Variable � � � frmReadMacro.frm fReadMacro.cpp

4.3.15. Writing Custom Macro Variable � � � frmWriteMacro.frm fWriteMacro.cpp

4.3.16. Reading Tool Life Management

Information

� � ∆ frmToolLife.frm fToolLife.cpp

4.3.17. Reading PMC Data � � � frmReadPMC.frm fReadPMC.cpp

4.3.18. Writing PMC Data � � � frmWritePMC.frm fWritePMC.cpp

4.3.19 Reading NC Parameters ��

� frmReadParam.frm fReadParam.cpp

4.3.20 Writing NC Parameters ��

� frmWriteParam.frm fWriteParam.cpp

4.3.21 Computer Start DNC Operation � �� frmDownload.frm fDownload.cpp

4.3.22 Canceling Computer Start Download � �� frmDownload.frm fDownload.cpp

4.3.23 Canceling Computer Start Upload � �� frmUpload.frm fUpload.cpp

4.4.3. Freeing Descriptor ID � � � frmAsync.frm fAsync.cpp

4.4.4. Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment � � � frmAsync.frm fAsync.cpp

4.4.5. Getting Error Code � � � frmMain.frm FComTstView.cpp

4.4.6. End of FA LIBRARY � � � frmMain.frm FComTstDoc.cpp

� : Supported �: Not supported ∆: To be supported -: Not required

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-78-

Using Sample Program

- Starting Sample Program

1 Confirm the next notes before starting the sample program.

� A computer must be connected to NC correctly, and the settings of

the Machine Configuration screen must correspond with the

communication parameters in NC.

The sample program can be started by clicking [ Sample (VB40)] or

[Sample (VC++)] in the [FANUC System for PC] group.

The points for starting the VB sample program

In case of VB, the user interface is provided with “OLE Automation”.

So, “Object” is created by the CreateObject() function, and the

services can be requested by calling “Method” of “Object”.

About the Form_Load() function in the “frmMain.frm” file

Set LogLib = CreateObject("LogClient.Library") �

Rtn = LogLib.InvokeLogServer("") �

Set FALib = CreateObject("FanucCom.Library") �

Rtn = FALib.Begin �

The “Object” of “OLE Automation” can be created by the

CreateObject() function of VB. The name of “Object” is

“ FanucCom.Library”.

The “FALib” global variable is defined in the “Common.bas” module.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-79-

The points for staring the VC++ sample program

In case of C++, the user interface is provided with “DLL”. The

functions are not “Class” of C++. Therefore, each function is called

directly.

About the CFComTstDoc::CFComTstDoc() function in the

“CFComTstDoc.cpp” file

::F_InvokeLogServer(""); �

::F_Begin(); �

� This is not necessary when FA LIBRARY is used with the LogServer

already started. See "4.5 Log Library."

� This is absolutely necessary for initializing FA LIBRARY.

- Starting to communicate process

2 The main screen of the sample program is shown like this.

3 Select the [Start Communication Process] command from the [System

Service] menu in the sample program's main menu.

4 Press the <Action> button.

Communication was started if [Success] is displayed at [Result:]. If [Fail]

is displayed, exit the [Start Communication Process] dialog and press the

<Get Last Error> button under the menu. This allows you to find out the

cause of the error.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-80-

Point in the VB sample program for starting the communication

process

About the cmdDoit_Click () function in the ”frmCreateComm.frm” file

Rtn = FALib.CreateCommunication() �

Point in the VC++ sample program for starting the communication

process

About the CfCreateManager::OnOK() function in

the ”fCreateManager.cpp” file

bRtn = ::F_CreateCommunication(); �

� This starts the communication process. The return value is used for

judging whether processing succeeded or failed.

- Downloading NC program

5 To download an NC program, place the NC program in the default-

directory in the computer.

The default-directory is defined in the Machine Configuration screen.

Click the [Download] command of the [Request Service 1] menu.

Enter the machine number in the [Machine Number] text box. Enter “0”

in [Tool Post Number].

There are the four ways to download an NC program. An NC program

can be downloaded by using any of the four ways.

File Number:

The files of the default-directory are arranged in order of ASCII code,

and the file is selected according to that order.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-81-

NC Program Number:

The file named “Oxxxx.yyy” in the default-directory is downloaded.

Where, “xxxx” is the NC program number specified in the above screen.

“yyy” is the file extension specified in [Default Extension] of [General]

of the Machine Configuration screen.

File Name:

The file is selected from the default-directory, and it is downloaded.

File-Path:

The file specified by the path in the screen is downloaded.

When you want to download the “O0003.DAT” program in the default-

directory, click the [File Name] and enter “O0003.DAT”.

Or click the [NC Program Number] and enter “3”.

6 After the NC program to be downloaded is selected, check the

[Synchronous] check box, and click the <Action> button.

If [Success] appears in [Result], the download is successful. If [Failed]

appears, click the <Get Last Error> button in the menu. The cause of the

failure can be found out.

The points for the download in the VB sample program

About the cmdDoit_Click() function in the “frmDownload.frm” file

If optFileNumber.Value = True Then

If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then

Rtn = FALib.DownloadFileNumber( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

FileNumber _

)

Else

ID = FALib.DownloadFileNumberEx( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

FileNumber _

)

End If

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-82-

ElseIf optFileName.Value = True Then

If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then

Rtn = FALib.DownloadFileName( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

FileName _

)

Else

ID = FALib.DownloadFileNameEx( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

FileName _

)

End If

ElseIf optONumber.Value = True Then

If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then

Rtn = FALib.DownloadONumber( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

ONumber _

)

Else

ID = FALib.DownloadONumberEx( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

ONumber_

)

End If

ElseIf optFilePath.Value = True Then

If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then

Rtn = FALib.DownloadFilePath( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

FilePath _

)

Else

ID = FALib.DownloadFilePathEx( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

FilePath _

)

End If

End If

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-83-

The points for the download in the VC++ sample program

About the OnOK() function in the “fDownload.cpp” file

switch(m_iFileType){

case 0:

// File Number

if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){

bRtn = ::F_DownloadFileNumber( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

lFileNumber

);

}else{

lID = ::F_DownloadFileNumberEx( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

lFileNumber );

}

break;

case 1:

// File Name

if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){

bRtn = ::F_DownloadFileName( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

(LPCTSTR)strFileName

);

} else{

lID = ::F_DownloadFileNameEx( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

(LPCTSTR)strFileName

);

}

break;

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-84-

case 2:

// O Number

if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){

bRtn = ::F_DownloadONumber( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

lONumber

);

}else{

lID = ::F_DownloadONumberEx( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

lONumber

);

}

break;

case 3:

// File Path

if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){

bRtn = ::F_DownloadFilePath( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

(LPCTSTR)strFilePath

);

}else{

lID = ::F_DownloadFilePathEx( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

(LPCTSTR)strFilePath

);

}

break;

}

� An NC program is selected by the file number, and it is downloaded

with a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine

number, the tool post number, and the file number specified in the

screen.

� An NC program is selected by the file number, and it is downloaded

with an asynchronous treatment. This function has the same

arguments as the synchronous function.

� An NC program is selected by the NC program number, and it is

downloaded with a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the

machine number, the tool post number, and the NC program number

specified in the screen.

� An NC program is selected by the NC program number, and it is

downloaded with an asynchronous treatment. This function has the

same arguments as the synchronous function.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-85-

� An NC program is selected by the file name, and it is downloaded with

a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine number,

the tool post number, and the file name specified in the screen.

� An NC program is selected by the NC file name, and it is downloaded

with an asynchronous treatment. This function has the same

arguments as the synchronous function.

� An NC program is selected by the file path, and it is downloaded with

a synchronous treatment. The arguments are the machine number,

the tool post number, and the file path specified in the screen.

� An NC program is selected by the file path, and it is downloaded with

an asynchronous treatment. This function has the same arguments

as the synchronous function.

In any case of synchronous functions, its return value indicates

whether the download is successful or not.

In case of asynchronous, the download is failed if the return value is

zero. The non-zero return value indicates the descriptor ID for getting

the download result.

7 Try to download an NC program with an asynchronous treatment. Clear

the [Synchronous] check box, and then click the <Action> button. The

descriptor ID is displayed in [ Return Value].

Click the [Asynchronous] command of the menu. The following dialog

box will appear.

Enter the descriptor ID in [ID] of this dialog, and then click the <Response>

button.

When the download is in progress, “In Progress” is displayed in [Result].

When it is complete, “Success” or “Failed” is displayed.

In case that “In Progress” is displayed, Click the <Response> button after a

short time.

If “Failed” is displayed, the error code is displayed in [Error Code] at the

same time.

When “Success” or “Failed” is displayed in [Result], click the <Free ID>

button.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-86-

The points for getting the result when an NC program is

downloaded with an asynchronous treatment in the VB sample

program.

About the Response_Click() function in the “frmAsync.frm” file

Rtn = FALib.Response(ID, Result, ErrorCode) �

If Rtn = True Then �

Select Case Result

Case 0

lblResult.Caption = Msg_InProgress �

Case 1

lblResult.Caption = Msg_Success �

Case 2

lblResult.Caption = Msg_Failed �

lblError.Caption = "0x" + Hex(ErrorCode) �

End Select

End If

The points for getting the result when an NC program is

downloaded with an asynchronous treatment in the VC++ sample

program.

About the OnBtnAsyncResponse() function in the “fAsync.cpp” file

bRtn = ::F_Response(m_lID, &lResult, &lError); �

if(TRUE == bRtn){

switch(lResult){

case 0:

m_strResult.LoadString(IDS_INPROCESS); �

break;

case 1:

m_strResult.LoadString(IDS_SUCCESS); �

break;

case 2:

m_strResult.LoadString(IDS_FAILED); �

m_strErrorCode.Format("0x%8.8x", lError); �

break;

}

}

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-87-

� Gets the result of the asynchronous treatment. The m_IID argument

is the descriptor ID entered in the screen.

� If the return value is TRUE, the function succeeded in getting the

result.

� If the result is “0”, the download is in progress.

� If the result is “1”, the download is complete successfully.

� If the result is “2”, the download is ended in failure.

� In failure, the cause can be found out by checking the error code.

The points for freeing the descriptor ID in the VB sample program

About the cmdFreeID_Click() function in the “frmAsync.cpp” file

Call FALib.FreeID(ID) �

The points for freeing the descriptor ID in the VB sample program

About the OnBtnAsyncFreeid() function in the “Async.cpp” file

::F_FreeID(m_lID); �

� Frees the descriptor ID. The m_IID argument is the descriptor ID

entered in the screen.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-88-

- Reading PMC data

8 Try to read the PMC data. Click the [Read PMC Data] command of the

[Request Service 2] menu.

9 Enter the machine number and the tool post number.

When you want to read the PMC address “R0003” to “R0007”, enter

“R” in the [Address of PMC data] text box, “3” in the [ Number of PMC

Data], and “5” in the [Count of PMC Data].

Next, check the [Synchronous] check box, and then click the <Action>

button.

If the PMC data is read successfully, the PMC data is displayed.

The [ Address of PMC Data] and [Number of PMC Data] can be entered

with the same format regardless of the kind of NCs.

But, the limit of PMC address varies according to the kind of PMC units.

Refer to the PMC manual for details.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-89-

Note that the value of [Order] is not a PMC number. In the above case, a

“1” of [Order] corresponds with “R0003”. And a “5” does “R0007”.

The points for reading the PMC data in the VB sample program

About the cmdDoit_Click() function in the “frmReadPMC.frm” file

If chkSynchro.Value = 1 Then

ID = FALib.ReadPMCData( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

PMCAddress, PMCNumber, Count _

)

Rtn = CopyData(lblResult) �

Call FALib.FreeID(ID) �

If Rtn = True Then

frmPMCDisplay.Show 1 �

End If

Else

ID = FALib.ReadPMCDataEx( _ �

MachineNumber, ToolPostNumber, _

PMCAddress, PMCNumber, Count _

)

End If

About the CopyData() function in the “frmReadPMC.frm” file

Rtn = FALib.GetCount(PMC_ID, PMCCount) �

ReDim PMC_Data(PMCCount) As Long �

Rtn = FALib.CopyPMCData( _ �

PMC_ID, PMC_Data(1), PMCCount, CopiedCount _

)

About the Form_Load() function in the “frmPMCDisplay.frm” file

For Count = 1 To PMC_Count �

Item = DataToList(Count, PMC_Data(Count))

lstPMC.AddItem Item

Next Count

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-90-

The points for reading the PMC data in the VC++ sample program

About the OnBtnReadpmcRead() function in the “fReadPMC.cpp”

file

CfPMCDisplay PMCDisplay;

if(TRUE == m_bSynchro){

lID = ::F_ReadPMCData( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

(LPCTSTR)m_strPMCAddress, m_lPMCNumber,

m_lCount

);

bRtn = PMCDisplay.Setup(lID, &m_strReadResult); �

::F_FreeID(lID);

if(TRUE == bRtn){

PMCDisplay.DoModal(); �

}

}else{

lID = ::F_ReadPMCDataEx( �

m_lMachineNumber, m_lToolPostNumber,

(LPCTSTR)m_strPMCAddress, m_lPMCNumber,

m_lCount

);

}

About the Setup() function in the “fPMCDisplay.cpp” file

bRtn = ::F_GetCount(lID, &lTotal); �

Create((DWORD)lTotal); �

bRtn = ::F_CopyPMCData( �

lID, m_lplPMCData, lTotal, &lCopiedCount

);

About the OnInitDialog() function in the “fPMCDisplay.cpp” file

for(lLoopCount = 0; lLoopCount < m_lCount; lLoopCount++){ �

DataToList

lLoopCount+1, m_lplPMCData[lLoopCount], &strBuf

);

iRtn = m_CListPMCData.AddString((LPCTSTR)strBuf);

}

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-91-

� Reads the PMC data with a synchronous treatment. The arguments

are the machine number, the tool post number, the PMC address, the

PMC number, and the count of the PMC data entered in the screen.

� Copies PMC data by using the descriptor ID. (The step � to � are

executed.)

� The descriptor ID is freed.

� Displays the PMC data. (The step � is executed.)

� Reads the PMC data with an asynchronous treatment. The

arguments are the same as the synchronous function.

� Gets the count of PMC data. (If the application program already knew

the value of the count, it doesn’t need to call the function.)

� Creates the array for copying PMC data.

� Copies the PMC data to the array.

� To display PMC data, the PMC data copied in the array is translated

into a character string, and writes it to the list box. This sequence is

repeated according to the number of PMC data.

10 This step is explained about reading PMC data with an asynchronous

treatment.

The asynchronous and the synchronous treatment can be operated by the

same settings, but clear the [Synchronous] check box and click the

<Action> button.

The descriptor ID is displayed in [ Return Value].

Click the [Asynchronous] command of the menu. The [Asynchronous

Procedure] dialog will appear.

Enter the descriptor ID in [ID] of the [ Asynchronous Procedure] dialog,

and then click the <Response> button.

If “Success” is displayed in [Result] of the [Asynchronous Procedure]

dialog, Click the <Display Data> button in the [Read PMC Data] dialog.

The PMC data is displayed. Lastly click the <Free ID> button in the

[Asynchronous Procedure] dialog.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-92-

- Exiting the Communication Process

11 Select the [Exit Communication Process] command from the [System

Service] menu in the sample program's main menu. The dialog box

below appears.

12 Press the <Action> button.

Communication was started if [Success] is displayed at [Result:]. If [Fail]

is displayed, exit the [Start Communication Process] dialog and press the

<Get Last Error> button under the menu. This allows you to find out the

cause of the error.

Point in the VB sample program for exiting the communication

process

About the cmdDoit_Click () function in the “frmCreateComm.frm” file

ComputerName = txtComputerName.Text �

Rtn = FALib.TerminateCommunication(ComputerName) �

Point in the VC++ sample program for exiting the communication

process

About the CfCreateManager::OnOK() function in the

“fCreateManager.cpp” file

lpszHostName = (LPCTSTR)m_strHostName; �

bRtn = ::F_TerminateCommunication(lpszHostName); �

� Set the name of the computer on which the communication process is

to be exited. Set "".

� This starts the communication process. The return value is used for

judging whether processing succeeded or failed.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-93-

- Finishing the sample program

13 Click the [End] command of the [File] menu in the sample program. The

sample program is finished.

The points for finishing the VB sample program

About the Form_Unload() function in the “frmMain.frm” file

FALib.End �

Set FALib = Nothing �

LogLib.TerminateLogServer �

Set LogLib = Nothing �

The points for finishing the VC++ sample program

About the OnCloseDocument() function in the “FcomTstDoc.cpp” file

::F_End(); �

::F_TerminateLogServer(); �

� Calls the function which terminates FA LIBRARY.

� In case of VB, “Object” is cleared by substituting “Nothing”.

� Execute this to terminate the LogServer.

� To start the LogServer, clear the object when the following is

executed:

Set LogLib = CreateObject("LogClient.Library")

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-94-

14 The above describes how to operate the typical services in the sample

program. In addition, the sample program includes the following

services.

For more information on each function in FA LIBRARY, refer to the

explanation of each function described later.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-95-

4.2 SYSTEM SERVICE

System service functions are used for starting and terminating FA SYSTEM

for PC, acquiring setting information, getting operating status and controlling

notice messages.

To start and terminate FA SYSTEM for PC, use the F_CreateCommunication,

F_Open, F_Close and F_TerminateCommunication functions. The following

figure shows the relationship between programs that run on FA SYSTEM for

PC and these four functions.

Levels 1 to 3 Start ProcedurePrograms must be started in order level 1 through to 3.

Levels 1 to 3 Start and Exit Functions

Level 1 Start by “4.5.1 F_InvokeLogServer” and terminate by “4.5.2 F_TerminateLogServer”.Level 2 Start by “4.2.1 F_CreateCommunication”. This function also starts at the same time as level 3.

Terminate by “4.2.2 F_TerminateCommunication”. This function also terminates at the same time

as level 3.

Level 3 Start by “4.2.2 F_Open” for each machine. This function is not required whenF_CreateCommunication has been executed.

Terminate by “4.2.3 F_Close” for each machine. F_Open is used to restart communication. This

function is not required when F_CreateCommunication has been executed.

LogServer

Program

Log Program Group

DNC1/Ethernet

Communication

Program

DNC1

Communication

Program

Reader/Puncher

Communication

Program

DNC2

Communication

Program

Communication Program Group

CDA Manager

Program

Communication

Manager Program

Management Program Group

Level 3

Level 2

Level 1

This icon starts all

programs in levels 1 to 3.

FA System icon

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-96-

To start FA SYSTEM for PC manually, click the [FA System] icon as

described in "2.5 Starting and Stopping FA SYSTEM for PC."

Follow the procedure below to communicate with an NC by FA SYSTEM for

PC.

First start a level 1 program. Start the LogServer by F_InvokeLogServer.

Next, start levels 2 and 3 simultaneously using F_CreateCommunication.

Communication with each machine cannot be initiated without starting

F_CreateCommunication. If a level 2 program has been started by

F_CreateCommunication, then you can terminate the communication program

for each machine by F_Close or start the communication program for each

machine by F_Open.

When level 1 to 3 programs are started, download, upload and read/write of

variables are possible using the functions described in "4.3 Request Service."

4.2.1 Start of Communication Process < F_CreateCommunication > *

SYNOPSIS

VB Function CreateCommunication() As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CreateCommunication(void);

DESCRIPTION

F_CreateCommunication starts the communication process in the

computer where the application program is running.

It is necessary that the communication process and the calling application are

in the same directory.

When the communication process is already started according to “2.5 Starting

and Stopping the Communication Process”, it isn’t necessary to start it.

This function doesn’t have any effect if the communication process is already

started.

NOTE

1 To execute this function, a level 1 program must already be executed.

2 When this function is executed, the "4.2.3 Start of

Communication<F_Open>" function is automatically executed on all

machines set in the Machine Setup screen. So, the F_Open function

need not be executed for each machine.

If you execute the F_Open function after this function is executed, the

error "Communication is already started (error code: 0x00010001)"

occurs.

You may ignore this error.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-97-

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_CreateCommunication succeeds, FALSE is

returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4.2.2 End of Communication Process

< F_TerminateCommunication > *

SYNOPSIS

VB Function TerminateCommunication

(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_TerminateCommunication (LPCTSTR ComputerName);

DESCRIPTION

F_TerminateCommunication terminates the communication process

which is running in the computer specified by ComputerName. When the

value of ComputerName is NULL, or when the character length of

ComputerName is zero, F_TerminateCommunication can terminate

the communication process in the computer where the application program is

running .

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_TerminateCommunication succeeds, FALSE is

returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

NOTE

1 To exit FA SYSTEM for PC, be sure to execute this function to exit

level 2 programs. Level 2 programs are not exited even if you execute

F_Close for all machines.

2 When this function is executed, the "4.2.4 Stop of

Communication<F_Close>" function is automatically executed on all

machines set in the Machine Setup screen. So, the F_Close function

need not be executed for each machine.

If you execute the F_Close function after this function is executed, the

error "Communication Manager is not started (error code:

0x1004020f)" occurs.

You may ignore this error.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-98-

4.2.3 Start of Communication < F_Open >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function Open(ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Open(LONG MachineNumber);

DESCRIPTION

F_Open starts communicating with the NC of the machine number specified

by MachineNumber.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Open succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

NOTE

1 This function is used to start communication for each machine.

To use this function, you must execute F_InvokeLogServer and

F_CreateCommunication to start level 1 and level 2 programs.

If you execute this function when level 1 and level 2 functions are not

started, the error "Communication Manager is not started (error code:

0x1004020f)" occurs.

2 When you execute F_CreateCommunication, communication with all

registered machines is started.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-99-

4.2.4 Stop of Communication < F_Close >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function Close(ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Close(LONG MachineNumber);

DESCRIPTION

F_Close stops communicating with the NC of the machine number specified

by MachineNumber. F_Close is applied to level 3 programs.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Close succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4.2.5 Confirmation of Communication < F_IsOpen >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function IsOpen (ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_IsOpen(LONG MachineNumber);

DESCRIPTION

F_IsOpen checks whether the computer communicates with the NC of the

machine number specified by MachineNumber.

RETURN VALUE

F_IsOpen returns TRUE if the computer is communicating with the

specified machine. Otherwise, FALSE is returned.

NOTE

1 This function is used for terminating communication with each

machine.

Level 2 programs are not terminated even if you execute this function

on all machines. To exit FA SYSTEM for PC, be sure to execute

F_TerminateCommunication.

2 When you execute F_TerminateCommunication, communication with

all registered machines is terminated.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-100-

4.2.6 Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers

<F_GetAllMachineNumber >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function GetAllMachineNumber

(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Long

C++ LONG F_GetAllMachineNumber (LPCTSTR ComputerName);

VB Function CopyMachineNumber

(ByVal ID As Long, MachineList As Long, ByVal Count As Long,

CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyMachineNumber

(LONG ID, LONG* MachineList, LONG Count,

LONG* CopiedCount);

DESCRIPTION

The following describes the procedure for getting the list of the registered

machines which are defined in the Machine Configuration screen.

1 F_GetAllMachineNumber gets the list of the machines registered in

the computer specified by ComputerName.

When the function succeeds, the return value indicates the descriptor ID

for pointing the list of the registered machine numbers.

2 F_GetCount gets the number of the registered machines associated

with the descriptor ID.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_GetAllMachineNumber.

Refer to Clause 4.4.1 for details

3 F_CopyMachineNumber takes out the list of the registered machine

numbers.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_GetAll MachineNumber.

Count specifies the number of the registered machines you want to read

at a time.

MachineList points to the array for placing machine numbers. The

array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same

number as Count specifies.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-101-

CopiedCount points to the buffer of four-byte integer for placing the

number of the actual copied machines

F_CopyMachineNumber takes out the machine numbers from the

internal information associated with the descriptor ID, and copies them

to the array specified by MachineList.

The number of the machines you want to copy is specified by Count.

The number of the actual copied machines is placed in CopiedCount.

The machine numbers acquired by F_CopyMachineNumber are

copied in order of the number.

F_CopyMachineNumber can copy machine numbers with dividing

into several times. When F_CopyMachine Number returns, the copy

offset is advanced to the next location of the actual copied machine

number.

4 F_Seek can move the copy offset to the machine number you want to

copy by using F_CopyMachineNumber.

5 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID when the copy is finished.

RETURN VALUE

F_GetAllMachineNumber returns the descriptor ID of the positive integer

for pointing the list of the registered machine number if it succeeds, and a

value of 0 is returned if it fails.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyMachineNumber succeeds, FALSE is

returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

MachineList�

Count

Four-byte integer

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-102-

4.2.7 Getting List of Communicating Machines

< F_GetOpenMachineNumber >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function GetOpenMachineNumber(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Long

C++ LONG F_GetOpenMachineNumber(LPCTSTR ComputerName);

DESCRIPTION

The following describes the procedure for getting the list of the

communicating machine numbers.

1 F_GetOpenMachineNumber can get the list of the machines which

are communicating with the computer specified by ComputerName.

When the function succeeds, the return value indicates the descriptor ID

for pointing the list of the communicating machines.

2 F_CopyMachineNumber takes out the machines associated with the

descriptor ID. Refer to Clause 4.2.6 “Getting List of Registered Machine

Numbers” for the details

RETURN VALUE

F_GetOpenMachineNumber returns the descriptor ID of a positive

integer for placing the list of the communicating machines if it succeeds, and a

value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-103-

4.2.8 Start of Receiving Notice Message < F_StartNotice >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function StartNotice (ByVal ComputerName As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_StartNotice(LPCTSTR ComputerName);

DESCRIPTION

When an application program calls F_StartNotice, the communication

process starts sending notice messages to it.

A notice message is the information for notifying an application program of

the status of the communication process.

The communication process reports the start and end of

downloading/uploading by operating NC side to an application program.

The communication process is running in the computer specified by

ComputerName. When the value of ComputerName is NULL, a notice

message will be sent from the communication process in the computer where

the calling application program is running.

Only one application can receive notice messages from the communication

process.

When one application has already called the function and has been receiving a

notice message from the computer specified by ComputerName, other

applications fail in the call of this function.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_StartNotice succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-104-

4.2.9 End of Receiving Notice Message < F_StopNotice >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function StopNotice(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_StopNotice(LPCTSTR ComputerName);

DESCRIPTION

When an application program calls F_StopNotice, the communication

process stops sending the notice messages. The communication process is

running in the computer specified by ComputerName. When the value of

ComputerName is NULL, the function selects the communication process

in the computer where the application program is running.

F_StopNotice can be called by the application program that called

F_StartNotice before.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_StopNotice succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4.2.10 Getting Descriptor ID of Notice Message < F_GetNoticeID >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function GetNoticeID

(ID As Long, RequestCode As Long,

MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_GetNoticeID

(LONG* ID, LONG* RequestCode, LONG* MachineNumber);

DESCRIPTION

F_GetNoticeID reads the notice message sent by the communication process.

When a message is sent, the descriptor ID of the positive integer is placed in

ID, the request code is placed in RequestCode, and the machine number is

placed in MachineNumber.

When there is no message, the value of 0 is set to ID. And no value is set to

RequestCode and MachineNumber.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_GetNoticeID succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-105-

4.2.11 Getting the Notice Message of the File Transfer

< F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function CopyNoticeFileTransfer

(ByVal ID As Long, Type As Long, ToolPostNumber As Long,

Key As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer

(LONG ID, LONG* Type, LONG* ToolPostNumber, LPCTSTR Key);

DESCRIPTION

When F_GetNoticeID returns the following request code,

F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer can take out the notice message.

Request Code Explanation

0x00100001 The Start and End of Downloading NC Program

Requested by NC

0x00100002 The Start and End of Uploading NC Program

Requested by NC

ID specifies descriptor ID returned by F_GetNoticeID.

The notice message is placed in the following arguments.

Type points to the four-byte integral flag for placing either of the start or

end flag. The value of “0x0” is the start flag, and “0xFFFFFFFF” is the end

flag.

ToolPostNumber points to the four-byte integral value for placing the tool

post number.

Key points to the four-byte integral value for placing the key used to transfer.

Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID when F_CopyNotice

FileTransfer is finished.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer succeeds, FALSE is

returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-106-

4.2.12 Getting Information about Machine < F_GetMachineInfo >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function GetMachineInfo

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal Name As String,

ByVal Protocol As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_GetMachineInfo

(LONG MachineNumber, LPCTSTR Name, LPCTSTR Protocol);

DESCRIPTION

F_GetMachineInfo reads the information of the machine specified by

MachineNumber

The machine information is placed in the following arguments.

Name points to the buffer for placing the machine name.

Protocol points to the buffer for placing the protocol type.

Each buffer must be a sequence of 33 characters or more length and each

character string is terminated by a NULL character.

The following is the character string written in Protocol .

The String of Protocol Explanation

“DNC1” DNC1

“DNC2” DNC2

“RP” Reader/Puncher

“DNC1ETHER” DNC1/Ethernet

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_GetMachineInfo succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

F_GetMachineInfo fails if the protocol type of a machine is registered with

“NONE” in the Machine Configuration Screen.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-107-

4.3 REQUEST SERVICE

4.3.1 Downloading NC Program requested by Computer

< F_Download... >

FA LIBRARY provides the four functions which can download an NC

program by using one of “file number”, “NC program number”, “file name”,

and “full path”, explained in Section 1.3. The four functions can be called

with a synchronous and an asynchronous treatment.

SYNOPSIS

<The file to be downloaded is specified by “ file number”>

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadFileNumber

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_DownloadFileNumber

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG FileNumber);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadFileNumberEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Long

NOTE

When DNC1/Ethernet is used for communicating with an NC, the

download is not reset even if you press the RESET key on the NC

during a download of the NC program requested by the computer.

(Until either the download ends successfully, or the download does not

end until an NC memory overflow or other error causes an NC alarm.)

To cancel the download of the NC program requested by the

computer, use the "cancel download of the NC program requested by

the computer " function described later.

To use this function, you must execute the download of the NC

program requested by the computer asynchronously. If the download

is executed synchronously, the application will not be returned to until

the download function ends. For this reason, the cancel function

cannot be used.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-108-

C++ LONG F_DownloadFileNumberEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG FileNumber);

<The file to be downloaded is specified by “file name”>

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadFileName

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileName As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_DownloadFileName

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FileName);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadFileNameEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileName As String) As Long

C++ LONG F_DownloadFileNameEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FileName);

<The file to be downloaded is specified by “NC program number” >

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadONumber

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_DownloadONumber

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadONumberEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_DownloadONumberEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-109-

<The file to be downloaded is specified by “full path” >

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadFilePath

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FilePath As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_DownloadFileName

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FilePath);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function DownloadFilePathEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FilePath As String) As Long

C++ LONG F_DownloadFileNameEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FilePath);

F_Download... indicates the synchronous functions in the four kinds of

functions shown in the above.

F_Download...Ex indicates the asynchronous functions in the four kinds of

functions shown in the above.

F_Download...(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the

asynchronous functions.

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_Download...(Ex) downloads an NC program to the NC memory.

There are the four ways to specify the file to be downloaded like these.

How to Specify Name of Function

File Number F_DownloadFileNumber(Ex)

File Name F_DownloadFileName(Ex)

NC Program Number F_DownloadONumber(Ex)

Full Path of File F_DownloadFilePath(Ex)

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-110-

The four functions have the common arguments of MachineNumber

and ToolPostNumber.

MachineNumber specifies a machine number.

ToolPostNumber specifies a tool post number. If DNC2 is used, “0”

must be set.

A file number is specified by FileNumber of

F_DownloadFileNumber(Ex). The range is from 1 to 9999.

A file name is specified by FileName of F_Download

FileName(Ex).

A NC program number is specified by Onumber of

F_DownloadONumber(Ex).

The full path is specified by FilePath of F_Download FilePath

(Ex).

Section 1.3 explains the rule for downloading the NC program specified

by a “file number”, a “file name”, a “NC program number”, and a “full

path”.

When the file to be downloaded is specified by “file number”, it is chosen

according to the files sorted in order of the ASCII code.

When the file is specified by “file name”, the specified file is selected

from the default-directory.

When the file is specified by “NC program number”, the file, whose name

is composed of Oxxxx(where, xxxx indicates a NC program number) and

the registered file extension, is downloaded.

When the file is specified by “full path”, the specified file is downloaded

without using the above rule.

2 F_Download... doesn’t return until the download is finished. You can

know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_Download...Ex requests the system to download an NC program,

and returns at once. The return value is descriptor ID for pointing the

result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and

whether its result is success or not by substituting the descriptor ID to

F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of

F_Download...Ex by using F_Response.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Download... succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_Download...Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for

pointing the result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-111-

4.3.2 Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer < F_Upload... >

FA LIBRARY provides the two functions which can upload an NC program

by using either of “NC program number” and “full path” explained in Section

1.3. The two functions can be called with a synchronous and an asynchronous

treatment.

SYNOPSIS

<In case that “NC program number” specifies the file which the uploaded NC

program is stored in >

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function UploadONumber

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_UploadONumber

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function UploadONumberEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_UploadONumberEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

NOTE

When DNC1/Ethernet is used for communicating with an NC, the

upload is not reset even if you press the RESET key on the NC during

the upload of the NC program requested by the computer. (Until either

the upload ends successfully, or the upload does not end until an NC

memory overflow or other error causes an NC alarm.) To cancel the

upload of the NC program requested by the computer, use the "cancel

upload of the NC program requested by the computer" function

described later.

To use this function, you must execute the upload of the NC program

requested by the computer asynchronously. If the upload is executed

synchronously, the application will not be returned to until the upload

function ends. For this reason, the cancel function cannot be used.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-112-

<In case that “full path” specifies the file which the uploaded NC program is

stored in >

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function UploadFilePath

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_UploadFilePath

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function UploadFilePathEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long, ByVal FilePath As String) As Long

C++ LONG F_UploadFilePathEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber, LPCTSTR FilePath);

F_Upload... indicates the synchronous functions in the two kinds of

functions shown in the above.

F_Upload...Ex indicates the asynchronous functions in the two kinds of

functions shown in the above.

F_Upload...(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous

functions.

DESPRICTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_Upload...(Ex) uploads an NC program from the specified NC. There

are the two ways to store the upload file like these.

How to Store Name of Function

NC Program Number F_UploadONumber(Ex)

Full Path F_UploadFilePath(Ex)

The two functions have the common arguments of MachineNumber,

ToolPostNumber and Onumber.

MachineNumber specifies a machine number.

ToolPostNumber specifies a tool post number.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-113-

ONumber specifies NC program number you want to upload from the

NC.

F_UploadONumber(Ex) uploads the NC program specified by

ONumber , and stores it in the file specified by the same ONumber

argument.

Section 1.3 explains the way to store the file created from “NC program

number”.

The uploaded NC program is stored in the file whose name is composed

of Oxxxx(where, xxxx is the NC program number) and the registered file

extension.

The file is stored in the directory registered for each machine.

F_UploadFilePath(Ex) uploads the NC program specified by

ONumber, and stores it in the file specified by FilePath.

2 F_Upload... doesn’t return until the request is finished. You can know

whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_Upload...Ex requests the system to upload an NC program, and

returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the

result. You must check whether request is finished or not, and whether its

result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of

F_Upload...Ex from F_Response.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Upload... succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_Upload...Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing

the result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-114-

4.3.3 External Reset < F_Reset >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function Reset

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long,

ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Reset (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function ResetEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long,

ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_ResetEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

F_Reset(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous

treatment.

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_Reset(Ex) resets the NC specified by Machine Number and

ToolPostNumber.

2 F_Reset doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You can know

whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_ResetEx requests the system to reset the NC, and returns at once.

The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must

check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is

success or not by calling F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of

F_ResetEx by calling F_Response.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Reset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_ResetEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the

result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-115-

4.3.4 Cycle Start < F_Start >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function Start

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long,

ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Start (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function StartEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long,

ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_StartEx (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

F_Start(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous

treatment.

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_Start(Ex) starts the NC specified by MachineNumber and

ToolPostNumber.

2 F_Start doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You can know

whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_StartEx requests the system to start the NC, and returns at once. The

return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check

whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or

not by calling F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of

F_StartEx by calling F_Response.

NOTE

This function cannot be used on DNC1/Ethernet. (It is scheduled to be

supported in the future.) Use the PMC data write function to execute a

reset via the ladder program.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-116-

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Start succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_StartEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the

result, if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.

4.3.5 Selecting NC Program in NC < F_Select >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function Select

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Select

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG

Onumber);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function SelectEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_SelectEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

F_Select(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous

functions.

NOTE

This function cannot be used on DNC1/Ethernet. (It is scheduled to be

supported in the future.) Use the PMC data write function to execute a

cycle start via the ladder program.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-117-

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_Select(Ex) selects the NC program in the NC specified by

MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

ONumber specifies the NC program number you want to select. The

range is from 1 to 9999.

2 F_Select doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You can know

whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_SelectEx requests the system to select the NC program in the NC

memory, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for

pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not,

and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of

F_SelectEx by calling F_Response.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Select succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_SelectEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the

result if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.

4.3.6 Deleting NC Program in NC < F_Delete >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function Delete

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Delete

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG Onumber);

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-118-

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function DeleteEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_DeleteEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

F_Delete(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous

functions.

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_Delete(Ex) deletes the NC program in the NC specified by

MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

ONumber specifies the NC program number you want to delete. The

range is from 1 to 9999.

2 F_Delete doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You can know

whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_DeleteEx requests the system to delete the NC program, and returns

at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You

must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result

is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of

F_DeleteEx by calling F_Response.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Delete succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_DeleteEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for pointing the

result if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-119-

4.3.7 Reading NC Identification < F_Identify >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function Identify

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long,

ByVal Identify As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Identify

(LONG MachineNumber, LPCTSTR Identify);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function IdentifyEx (ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_IdentifyEx(LONG MachineNumber);

F_Identify(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous

functions.

VB Function F_CopyIdentify

(ByVal ID As Long, ByVal Identify As String) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyIdentify(LONG ID, LPCTSTR Identify);

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_Identify(Ex) gets the identification of the NC specified by

MachineNumber.

In case of DNC1, the information is the sequence of the character string

in order of “model name”, “version”, and “vender name”. Each data is

separated by a comma “,” and the information is terminated by a NULL

character.

In case of DNC2, the information is the sequence of the character string

in order of “model name” and “version”.

Each data is separated by a comma “,” and the information is terminated

by a NULL character.

2 F_Identify reads the identification and takes out it.

Identify points to the buffer for placing the NC identification with

terminated by a NULL character. The buffer must be a sequence of 129

characters or more length.

F_Identify doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You can know

whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-120-

3 F_IdentifyEx requests the system to read the NC identification, and

returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the

result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and

whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

When the request is finished successfully, F_Copy IdentifyEx can take

out the NC identification.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_IdentifyEx.

Identify points to the buffer for placing the NC identification with

terminated by a NULL character. The buffer must be a sequence of 129

characters or more length.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by IdentifyEx after

taking out the NC identification.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Identify succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_IdentifyEx returns the positive integral value of the descriptor ID for

pointing the result if it succeeds, the value of 0 is returned if it fails.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyIdentify succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4.3.8 Reading List of NC Program in NC < F_AllFileDirectory >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function AllFileDirectory

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long,

ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_AllFileDirectory

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call

them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out AllFileDirectoryEx or

F_AllFileDirectoryEx.

(F_)AllFileDirectory and (F_)AllFileDirectoryEx have the same

argument and the same type of the return value.

VB Function CopyFileDirectory

(ByVal ID As Long, ONumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long,

CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyFileDirectory

(LONG ID, LONG* ONumber,LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-121-

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7, and 8 in case of the

synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5,6,7, and 8 in case of the

asynchronous treatment.

1 F_AllFileDirectory(Ex) reads the list of NC programs in the NC

specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

2 F_AllFileDirectory doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You

can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the

list of NC program.

3 F_AllFileDirectoryEx requests the system to read the directory list,

and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the

result. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and

whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 When F_AllFileDirectory(Ex) is finished successfully, you can take

out the list as follows.

5 F_GetCount gets the number of the NC programs associated with the

descriptor ID.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_AllFileDirectory(Ex).

Refer to Clause 4.4.1 for details.

6 F_CopyFileDirectory takes out the list of the NC programs associated

with the descriptor ID.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_AllFileDirectory(Ex).

Count specifies the number of the NC programs you want to copy at a

time.

Onumber points to the array for placing the NC programs. The array

must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number

as Count specifies.

ONumber�

Count

Four-byte integer

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-122-

CopiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the

actual copied number.

F_CopyFileDirectory takes out the NC programs from the descriptor

ID, and copies them to the array specified by ONumber.

Count specifies the number of NC programs you want to copy. The

number of the actual copied NC program number is set to

CopiedCount.

F_CopyFileDirectory can copy an NC program number with dividing

into several times. When F_CopyFileDirectory returns, the copy offset

is advanced to the next location of the actual copied NC program.

7 F_Seek can move the copy offset to the NC program you want to copy

by using F_CopyFileDirectory.

8 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID when you finish the copy of NC

programs.

RETURN VALUE

F_AllFileDirectory(Ex) returns the descriptor ID of the positive integer for

pointing the list of the NC program if it succeeds. And a value of 0 is returned

if it fails.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyFileDirectory succeeds, FALSE is returned if

it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by using F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-123-

4.3.9 Establishing DNC1 Connection < F_EstablishDnc1 >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function EstablishDnc1 (ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_EstablishDnc1(LONG MachineNumber);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function EstablishDnc1Ex(ByVal MachineNumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_EstablishDnc1Ex(LONG MachineNumber);

F_EstablishDnc1(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the

asynchronous functions.

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2 in case of the synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_EstablishDnc1(Ex) establishes the DNC1 connection of the NC

specified by MachineNumber. The function is effective to the machine

registered to DNC1 in the Machine Configuration screen.

2 F_EstablishDnc1 doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You

can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_EstablishDnc1Ex requests the system to make connection with the

NC, and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for

pointing the result. You must check whether the request is finished or not,

and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID after getting the result of

F_EstablishDnc1Ex by calling F_Response.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_EstablishDnc1 succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

F_EstablishDnc1Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for

pointing the result if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried

out.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-124-

4.3.10 Confirmation of DNC1 Connection < F_ConfirmDnc1 >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function ConfirmDnc1

(ByVal ComputerName As String, Linked As Long,

CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_ConfirmDnc1

(LPCTSTR ComputerName, LONG* Linked, LONG* CopiedCount);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function ConfirmDnc1Ex(ByVal ComputerName As String) As Long

C++ LONG F_ConfirmDnc1Ex(LPCTSTR ComputerName);

F_ConfirmDnc1(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the

asynchronous functions.

VB Function F_CopyDnc1Linked

(ByVal ID As Long, Linked As Long,

CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyDnc1Linked(LONG ID, LONG* Linked, LONG* CopiedCount);

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous

treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4, and 5 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_ConfirmDnc1(Ex) gets the list of the machines which are connected

to the computer by DNC1 and which has been established.

ComputerName specifies a computer name. When the value of

ComputerName is NULL, the function can get the machines

connected to the computer where the application program is running.

2 F_ConfirmDnc1 reads the established machines and takes out them.

Linked points to the array for placing the machine number. The array

must be composed of the 32 four-byte integral elements.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-125-

CoiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the

actual copied number.

F_ConfirmDnc1 doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You can

know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_ConfirmDnc1Ex requests the system to read the data, and returns at

once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the list of the

established machines. You must check whether the request is finished or

not, and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 When the request is finished successfully, F_CopyDnc1Linked can

take out the list of the established machines.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ConfirmDnc1.

Linked points to the array for placing the machine number. The array

must be composed of the 32 four-byte integral elements.

CoiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the

actual copied number.

F_CopyDnc1Linked reads the list of the established machines from

the descriptor ID, and copies them to the array pointed to by Linked.

The actual copied number is set to CopiedCount.

5 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by

F_CopyDnc1Linkd after taking out the established machines.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_ConfirmDnc1 succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_ConfirmDnc1Ex returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for

pointing the list of the machines if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it

fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

List� 0

1

2

29

30

31

Four-bye integer

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-126-

4.3.11 Reading Alarm Information < F_ReadAlarm >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Funciton ReadAlarm

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

Alarm As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_ReadAlarm

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber, LONG* Alarm);

In asynchronous treatment

VB Funciton ReadAlarmEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long,

ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_ReadAlarmEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

F_ReadAlarm(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the asynchronous

functions.

VB Function F_CopyAlarm(ByVal ID As Long, Alarm As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyAlarm(LONG ID, LONG* Alarm);

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous

treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4, and 5 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_ReadAlarm(Ex) reads the alarm information of the NC specified by

MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

2 F_ReadAlarm reads the alarm information from NC, and sets to the

four-byte integral buffer pointed to by Alarm.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-127-

The following table shows the alarm information in Alarm.

List of Alarms

DescriptionBit

FS15 FS0 FS16/FS18

0 Background PS alarm P/S100 P/S100

1 Foreground PS alarm P/S000 P/S000

2 Overheat alarm P/S101 P/S101

3 Sub CPU error Other PS Other PS

4 Excessive synchronize error alarm Overtravel Overtravel

5 Parameter write switch ON Overheat Overheat

6 Overtravel alarm Servo alarm Servo alarm

7 PMC error (not used) (not used)

8 External error message (not used) APC alarm

9 (not used) (not used) Spindle alarm

10 Serious PS alarm (not used) Punch press alarm in PS5000 range

11 (not used) (not used) Laser alarm

12 Servo alarm (not used) (not used)

13 I/O error (not used) Rigid tap alarm

14 Parameter entry requiring power OFF (not used) (not used)

15 System error alarm (not used) External error message

16-31 (not used) (not used) (not used)

F_ReadAlarm doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You can

know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_ReadAlarmEx requests the system to read the alarm information,

and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the

alarm information. You must check whether the request is finished or not,

and whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 When request is finished successfully, F_CopyAlarm can take out the

alarm information.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadAlarmEx.

Alarm points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the alarm

information.

5 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadAlarm

after taking out the alarm information.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_ReadAlarm succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_ReadAlarmEx returns the positive integer of the descriptor ID for

pointing the alarm information if it succeeds. The value of 0 is returned if it

fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError .

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-128-

4.3.12 Reading Tool Offset < F_ReadToolOffset >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function ReadToolOffset

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal OffsetType As Long, ByVal OffsetNumber As Long,

ByVal Count As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_ReadToolOffset

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG OffsetType, LONG OffsetNumber, LONG Count);

The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call

them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out ReadToolOffsetEx or

F_ReadToolOffsetEx.

(F_)ReadToolOffset and (F_)ReadToolOffsetEx have the same

arguments and the same type of the return value.

VB Function CopyToolOffset

(ByVal ID As Long, ToolOffsetValue As Long,

ToolOffsetExponent As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyToolOffset

(LONG ID, LONG* ToolOffsetValue, LONG* ToolOffsetExponent);

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9 and 10 in case of the

synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 and 10 in case of the

asynchronous treatment.

1 F_ReadToolOffset(Ex) reads the tool offset from the NC specified by

MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

OffsetType specifies the type of the tool offset.

OffsetNumber specifies the start number of the tool offset you want to

read.

Count specifies the number of tool offsets you want to read at a time.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-129-

OffsetType values are constructed by OR-ing flags from the following

table.

Bit Type of Tool Offset Type of NC

0 Wear Offset D(Cutter Offset� M

1 Geometric Offset K(Cutter Offset � M

2 Wear Offset X(X-axis Tool Offset Value� T

3 Wear Offset Z(Z-axis Tool Offset Value� T

4 Wear Offset R(Tool-tip Radius Offset Value� T

5 Wear Offset Y(Y-axis Tool Offset Value � T

6 Virtual Tool-tip direction Q T

7 Not Used

8 Wear Offset H(Tool Length Offset� M

9 Geometric Offset L(Tool Length Offset� M

10 Geometric Offset U(X-axis Tool Offset Value � T

11 Geometric Offset W(Z-axis Tool Offset Value � T

12 Geometric Offset P(Tool-tip Radius Offset Value ) T

13 Geometric Offset V(Y-axis Tool Offset Value � T

14 Not Used

15 Not Used

Where, “M” of “Type of NC” indicates the milling machine, and “T”

indicates the turning machine.

OffsetType values must not be constructed by both of the milling and

the turning type offset flag.

In case of DNC2, “Geometric Offset Q” must not be used.

Don’t set this flag to OffsetType in case of DNC2.

2 F_ReadToolOffset doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You

can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the

tool offset.

3 F_ReadToolOffsetEx requests the system to read the tool offset data,

and returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the

tool offset. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and

whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 When request is finished successfully, you can take out the tool offset as

follows.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-130-

5 F_CopyToolOffset copies the tool offset to the specified arrays.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolOffset(Ex).

ToolOffsetValue points to the array for placing the tool offset value.

ToolOffsetExponent points to the array for placing the exponent of

the tool offset. Each array must be composed of 16 four-byte elements.

F_CopyToolOffset takes out one tool offset from the descriptor ID,

and F_CopyToolOffset places it in the array pointed to by

ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent .

6 OffsetType specifies the type of tool offset with the bit flag. The

position of the bit flag(0~15) indicates the type of the tool offset as

shown at the former table. And the bit position(0~15bit) corresponds to

the element number(0~15) of array pointed to by ToolOffsetValue and

ToolOffsetExponent .

For Example, when the bit 0 of OffsetType is ON, the “Wear Offset D”

is placed in the first element of the arrays pointed to by

ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent. No value is placed in

the other elements corresponding to the positions of inactive bits on

OffsetType.

7 The tool offset value can be calculated by substituting the contents of the

arrays pointed to by ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent for

the following equation.

Tool offset value corresponding to the bit N =

ToolOffsetValue[N] �10^(�ToolOffsetExponent[N]�

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-131-

Where, “ N” is 0 to 15, and “^ “ indicates the power operation.

8 F_CopyToolOffset copies one tool offset data at a time. To get all the

tool offset data, repeat F_CopyToolOffset the same times as the

number specified by the Count argument of F_ReadToolOffset(Ex).

9 F_Seek can move the point to the tool offset you want to copy by using

F_CopyToolOffset.

10 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by

F_ReadToolOffset (Ex) when you finish the copy of tool offsets.

RETURN VALUE

F_ReadToolOffset(Ex) returns a descriptor ID of the positive integer for

pointing the tool offset if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyToolOffset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

0

1

2

13

14

15

ToolOffset

Value�

OffsetNumber

OffsetNumber

+ 1

OffsetNumber

+ Count -1

ToolOffset

Exponent�0 Wear Offset D

1 Geometric Offset�

2 Geometric Offset�

13 Geometric Offset�

14 Geometric Offset�

15 �Not used�

Four-byte integer Four-byte integer

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-132-

4.3.13 Writing Tool Offset < F_WriteToolOffset >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function CreateToolOffsetID

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal OffsetType As Long, ByVal OffsetNumber As Long,

ByVal Count As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_CreateToolOffsetID

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG OffsetType, LONG OffsetNumber, LONG Count);

VB Function SetToolOffset

(ByVal ID As Long, ToolOffsetValue As Long,

ToolOffsetExponent As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_SetToolOffset

(LONG ID, LONG* ToolOffsetValue, LONG* ToolOffsetExponent);

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function WriteToolOffset(ByVal ID As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_WriteToolOffset(LONG ID);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function WriteToolOffsetEx(ByVal ID As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_WriteToolOffsetEx(LONG ID);

F_WriteToolOffset(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the

asynchronous functions.

DESCRIPTION

To write a tool offset data, you must go through the three procedures as

follows;

- Creating the descriptor ID for pointing the tool offset

- Setting a tool offset data on the area pointed to by the descriptor ID

- Writing it to NC

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4 and 5 in case of the synchronous

treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,5,6 and 7 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-133-

1 F_CreateToolOffsetID creates the area for setting the tool offset data ,

and returns the descriptor ID.

MachineNumber specifies a machine number.

ToolPostNumber specifies a tool post number.

OffsetType specifies the type of the tool offset you want to write. Refer

to “4.3.12 Read Tool Offset” for meaning of OffsetType.

OffsetNumber specifies the start address of tool offset number you

want to write.

Count specifies the number of the tool offset you want to write.

2 F_SetToolOffset sets the tool offset data to the area pointed to by the

descriptor ID.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_CreateToolOffsetID.

ToolOffsetValue points to the array where the tool offset data is

written by the application program.

ToolOffsetExponent points to the array where the exponent of the

tool offset is written by the application program.

Each array must be composed of the 16 four-byte integral elements. You

set the tool offset to the arrays. Refer to “4.3.12 Reading Tool Offset” for

the way to write it to ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent .

In case of DNC2, OffsetType values must be constructed by the

following flags.

0 bit only

0, 1 bits

0, 1, 8, 9 bits

2, 3, 4, 5, 6 bits

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13 bits

3 F_SetToolOffset copies one tool offset data to the area pointed to by

the descriptor ID at a time.

To write all the tool offset data to the area, repeat F_SetToolOffset the

same times as the number specified by the Count argument of

F_CreateTool OffsetID.

4 F_WriteToolOffset(Ex) writes the tool offset data associated with the

descriptor ID.

For Example, the N-th tool offset number copied by F_SetToolOffset

is set to the N-th element of the area created by F_CreateToolOffsetID.

And the N-th data is written as the (OffsetNumber+N-1)-th address of

tool offset to the NC. Where, the range of “N” is from 1 to Count.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-134-

5 F_WriteToolOffset doesn’t return until the treatment is finished. You

can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

You don’t need to free the descriptor ID returned by

F_CreateToolOffset.

6 F_WriteToolOffsetEx requests the system to write the tool offset data,

and returns at once. If F_WriteToolOffsetEx succeeds, it returns the

same descriptor ID as F_CreateToolOffset returns. Otherwise, the

value of 0 is returned. In failure, you don’t need to free the descriptor ID

returned by F_CreateToolOffset.

On success, you check whether the request is finished or not, and

whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

7 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by

F_WriteToolOffsetEx after the request is finished.

RETURN VALUE

F_CreateToolOffsetID returns the descriptor ID for pointing the tool offset

if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

TRUE is returned if F_SetToolOffset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

TRUE is returned if F_WriteToolOffset succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

F_WriteToolOffsetEx returns the descriptor ID for pointing the result if it

succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-135-

4.3.14 Reading Custom Macro Variable

< F_ReadCustomMacroVariable >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function F_ReadCustomMacroVariable

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal VariableNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_ReadCustomMacroVariable

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG VariableNumber, LONG Count);

The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call

them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out

ReadCustomMacroVariableEx or F_ReadCustomMacro

VariableEx.

(F_)ReadCustomMacroVariable and (F_)ReadCustomMacro

VariableToolEx have the same arguments and the same type of the return

value .

F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous

and the asynchronous functions.

VB Function F_CopyCustomMacroVariable

(ByVal ID As Long, VariableValue As Long,

VariableExponent As Long, ByVal Count As Long,

CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean

C++ LONG F_CopyCustomMacroVariable

(LONG ID, LONG* VariableValue, LONG* VariableExponent,

LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7,8 and 9 in case of the

synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,5,6,7,8 and 9 in case of the

asynchronous treatment.

1 F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) reads the custom macro variable

from the NC specified by MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

VariableNumber specifies the start number of the custom macro

variable you want to read.

Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to

read.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-136-

2 F_ReadCustomMacroVariable doesn’t return until the request is

finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the

return value.

On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the

custom macro variable.

3 F_ReadCustomMacroVariableEx requests the system to read the

custom macro variable, and returns at once. The return value is the

descriptor ID for pointing the custom macro variable. You must check

whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result is success or

not by calling F_Response.

4 When request is finished successfully, you can take out the custom macro

variables as follows.

5 F_CopyCustomMacroVariable copies the custom macro variable to

the specified arrays.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by

F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex).

Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to

copy at a time.

VariableValue points to the array for placing the custom macro

variable.

VariableExponent points to the array for placing the exponents of the

custom macro variables.

Each array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the

same number as Count specifies.

CopiedCount points to the four-byte integer for placing the actual

copied number.

Variable

Value�

Variable

Exponent�

Count

Four-byte integer Four-byte integer

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-137-

F_CopyCustomMacroVariable takes out the custom macro variables

from the descriptor ID, and places them in the array pointed to by

VariableValue and VariableExponent.

Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to

copy at a time.

The actual copied number is placed in the buffer pointed to by

CopiedCount.

The custom macro variable can be calculated by substituting the contents

of the arrays pointed to by VariableValue and VariableExponent for

the following equation.

The N-th Custom Macro Variable =

VariableValue[N] �10^( � VariableExponent[N] )

Where, “ N” is from 0 to (Count � 1).

And, “^ “ indicates the power operation.

6 F_CopyCustomMacroVariable can copy several variables with

dividing into several times. When F_CopyCustomMacroVariable

returns, the copy offset is advanced to the next location of the actual

copied data.

7 F_Seek can move the copy offset to the custom macro variable you

want to copy by using F_CopyCustom MacroVariable.

8 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by

F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) when you finish taking out the

custom macro variables .

RETURN VALUE

F_ReadCustomMacroVariable(Ex) returns a descriptor ID for pointing

the custom macro variable if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyCustomMacroVariable succeeds, FALSE is

returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried

out.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-138-

4.3.15 Writing Custom Macro Variable < F_WriteCustomMacroVariable >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function F_WriteCustomMacroVariable

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal VariableNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long,

VariableValue As Long, VariableExponent As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_WriteCustomMacroVariable

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG VariableNumber, LONG Count, L

ONG* VariableValue, LONG* VairableValue);

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal VariableNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long,

VariableValue As Long, VariableExponent As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG VariableNumber, LONG Count,

LONG* VariableValue, LONG* VairableValue);

F_WriteCustomMacroVariable(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous

and the asynchronous functions.

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous

treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3 and 4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_WriteCustomMacroVariable(Ex) writes the custom macro

variable to the NC specified by MachineNumber and

ToolPostNumber.

VariableNumber specifies the start address of the custom macro

variable you want to write.

Count specifies the number of the custom macro variables you want to

write.

ToolOffsetValue and ToolOffsetExponent point to the arrays

where the custom macro variables are written.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-139-

each array must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the

same number as Count specifies. You set the custom macro variable to

the arrays. Refer to the “4.3.14 Reading Custom Macro Variable” for the

way to write data to VariableValue and VariableExponent.

2 F_WriteCustomMacroVariable doesn’t return until the request is

finished. You can know whether the function has succeeded or not by the

return value.

3 F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx requests the system to write the

custom macro variable, and returns at once. The return value is the

descriptor ID for pointing the result. You must check whether the request

is finished or not, and whether its result is success or not by calling

F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by

F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx when the request is finished.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_WriteCustomMacroVariable succeeds, FALSE is

returned if it fails.

F_WriteCustomMacroVariableEx returns a descriptor ID for pointing the

custom macro variable if it succeeds. If it is fails, a value of 0 is returned.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError .

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-140-

4.3.16 Reading Tool Life Management Information < F_ReadToolLife >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function F_ReadToolLife

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ToolGroupNumber As Long, ByVal Count As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_ReadToolLife

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ToolGroupNumber, LONG Count);

The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call

them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out ReadToolLifeEx or

F_ReadToolLifeEx.

(F_)ReadToolLife and (F_)ReadToolLifeEx have the same arguments

and the same type of the return value.

F_ReadToolLife(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the

asynchronous functions.

VB Function F_CopyToolLifeParameter

(ByVal ID As Long, ToolGroupNumber As Long, ToolUsed As Long,

ToolLife As Long, ToolCount As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyToolLifeParameter

(LONG ID, LONG* ToolGroupNumber,

LONG* ToolUsed, LONG* ToolLife, LONG* ToolCount);

VB Function F_CopyToolLife

(ByVal ID As Long, ToolNumber As Long,

ToolLengthCompensation As Long, CutterCompensation As Long,

ToolInformation As Long, ByVal Count As Long,

CopiedCount as Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyToolLife

(LONG ID, LONG* ToolNumber, LONG* ToolLengthCompensation,

LONG* CutterCompensation, LONG* ToolInformation,

LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);

VB Function F_SeekToolLife

(ByVal ID As Long, ByVal Offset As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_SeekToolLife(LONG ID, LONG Offset);

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-141-

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5,6,7,8 and 9 in case of the

synchronous treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5,6,7,8 and 9 in case of the

asynchronous treatment.

1 F_ReadToolLife(Ex) reads the tool life data from the NC specified by

MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

ToolGroupNumber specifies the start address of the tool group you

want to read.

Count specifies the number of the tool group data you want to read.

2 F_ReadToolLife doesn’t return until the request is finished. You can

know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for the tool life

data

3 F_ReadToolLifeEx requests the system to read the tool life data, and

returns at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for placing the tool

life data. You must check whether the request is finished or not, and

whether its result is success or not by calling F_Response.

4 When request is finished successfully, you can take out the tool life data

as follows.

5 F_Seek moves the copy offset to the tool group you want to take out.

F_CopyToolLifeParameter, F_CopyToolLife and

F_SeekToolLife takes out the tool life data of the tool group moved by

F_Seek.

Offset of F_Seek is from the value of 0 to (Count of F_ReadTool

Offset(Ex) �1).

For example, ToolGroupNumber is set to 5, Count is set to 3, and

then you read the tool life data by using F_ReadToolOffset. In this

case, the following table shows the relations between Offset of F_Seek

and the tool group number of F_CopyToolLifeParameter,

F_CopyToolLife, and F_SeekToolLife.

Offset of F_Seek Tool Group Number

0 �

1 �

2 �

The tool group number must be changed by using F_Seek.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-142-

6 F_CopyToolLifeParameter takes out the information of the tool

group number specified by F_Seek.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolLife(Ex).

ToolGroupNumber points to the buffer for placing the tool group

number.

ToolUsed points to the buffer for placing the tool life counter.

ToolLife points to the buffer for placing the tool life.

ToolCount points to the buffer for placing the number of tools.

Each buffer must be the four-byte integer.

If the specified tool group is not registered in the NC, the value of 0 is

placed in ToolUsed, ToolLife, and ToolCount .

F_CopyToolLife takes out the information of the tool which belongs

to the tool group number specified by F_Seek.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolLife(Ex).

Count specifies the number of you want to read.

ToolLengthCompensation points to the array for placing the tool

length offset.

CutterCompensation points to the array for placing the cutter offset.

ToolInformation points to the array for placing the tool information.

Each array pointed to by ToolLengthCompensation,

CutterCompensation, and ToolInformation must be composed of

the four-byte integral elements of the same number as Count specifies.

CopiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the

actual copied number.

F_CopyToolLife takes out the tool life information from the descriptor

ID, and places them in the arrays pointed to by

ToolLengthCompensation, Cutter Compensation and

ToolInformation.

Count specifies the number of tool life data you want to read at a time.

The actual copied number is placed in the buffer pointed to by

CopiedCount.

The following value is placed in ToolInformation .

0 : The current using tool

1 : The registered tool

2 : The tool life is run out.

3 : The tool is skipped

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-143-

7 F_CopyToolLife can copy information with dividing into several times.

When F_CopyToolLife returns, the pointer is advanced to the next

location of the actual copied data.

8 F_SeekToolLife can move the copy offset to the tool life information

you want to copy by using F_CopyToolLife.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadToolLife(Ex).

Offset specifies the number of the tool life information you want to read.

The range of Offset is from the value of 0 to (ToolCount �1).

9 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by

F_ReadToolLife(Ex) when you finish the copy of tool life information.

RETURN VALUE

F_ReadToolLife(Ex) returns a descriptor ID for pointing the tool life

information if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyToolLifeParameter succeeds, FALSE is

returned if it fails.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyToolLife succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

TRUE is returned if F_SeekToolLife succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

Cutter

Compensation

Tool

Information

Tool

Count

ToolLength

Compensation

ToolGroupNumber

+ 1

ToolGroupNumber

+Count - 1

ToolGroupNumber

Four-byte integer Four-byte integer Four-byte integer

ToolGroup

Number�

ToolUsed�

ToolLife�

ToolCount�

Four-byte integer Four-byte integer

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-144-

4.3.17 Reading PMC Data < F_ReadPMCData >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function F_ReadPMCData

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal PMCAddress As String, ByVal PMCNumber As Long,

ByVal Count As Long) As Long

C++ LONG F_ReadPMCData

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR PMCAddress, LONG PMCNumber, LONG Count);

The above functions run as the synchronous treatment. If you want to call

them as the asynchronous treatment, carry out ReadPMCDataEx or

F_ReadPMCDataEx.

(F_)ReadPMCData and (F_)ReadPMCDataEx have the same

arguments and the same type of the return value.

F_ReadPMCData(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and asynchronous

function.

VB Function F_CopyPMCData

(ByVal ID As Long, PMCData As Byte, ByVal Count As Long,

CopiedCount As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_CopyPMCData

(LONG ID, BYTE* PMCData, LONG Count, LONG* CopiedCount);

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1,2,4,5 and 6 in case of the synchronous

treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3,4,5 and 6 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_ReadPMCData(Ex) reads the PMC data from the NC specified by

MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber .

PMCAddress specifies the PMC address such as the one character of

“X” or “R”. And must be terminated by the NULL character.

PMCNumber specifies the start address of the PMC number.

Count specifies the number of the PMC data you want to read.

NOTE

This function cannot be used on DNC1/Ethernet. (It is scheduled to be

supported in the future.)

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-145-

2 F_ReadPMC doesn’t return until the request is finished. You can know

whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

On success, the return value indicates the descriptor ID for pointing the

PMC data.

3 F_ReadPMCEx requests the system to read the PMC data, and returns

at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the PMC data.

You must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its

result is success or not by using F_Response.

4 When F_ReadPMC(Ex) finished successfully, please proceed to the

next step.

5 F_CopyPMCData can take out the PMC data.

ID specifies the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadPMCData(Ex).

Count specifies the number of the PMC data you want to read.

PMCData points to the array for placing the PMC data. The array must

be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number as

Count specifies.

The PMC data is placed in only the least significant byte of the four-byte

integer.

CopiedCount points to the four-byte integral buffer for placing the

number of the actual copied data.

F_CopyPMCData takes out the PMC data from the descriptor ID, and

places them in the array pointed to by PMCData.

The actual copied number is placed in the array pointed to by

CopiedCount.

6 F_CopyPMCData can copy PMC data with dividing into several times.

When F_CopyPMCData returns, the offset is advanced to the next

location of the actual copied data.

PMCData�

Count

�Up to 32 elements�

Least Significant byte of four-byte integer

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-146-

7 F_Seek can move the copy offset to the PMC data you want to copy by

using F_CopyPMCData.

8 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID returned by F_ReadPMCData

(Ex) when you finish taking out PMC data.

RETURN VALUE

F_ReadPMCData(Ex) returns a descriptor ID for pointing the PMC data if

it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned .

TRUE is returned if F_CopyPMCData succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried

out.

4.3.18 Writing PMC Data< F_WritePMCData >

SYNOPSIS

In case of the synchronous treatment

VB Function F_WritePMCData

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal PMCAddress As String, ByVal PMCNumber As Long,

ByVal Count As Long, PMCData As Byte) As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_WritePMCData

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR PMCAddress, LONG PMCNumber,

LONG Count, BYTE *PMCData );

In case of the asynchronous treatment

VB Function F_WritePMCDataEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal PMCAddress As String, ByVal PMCNumber As Long

ByVal Count As Long, PMCData As Byte) As Long

VC++ LONG F_WritePMCDataEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR PMCAddress, LONG PMCNumber,

LONG Count, BYTE *PMCData );

F_WritePMCData(Ex) indicates both of the synchronous and the

asynchronous functions.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-147-

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to the following procedure 1 and 2 in case of the synchronous

treatment.

Proceed to the following procedure 1,3 and 4 in case of the asynchronous

treatment.

1 F_WritePMCData(Ex) writes the PMC data to the NC specified by

MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber.

PMCAddress specifies the PMC address such as the one character of

“R” or “D”. And must be terminated by NULL.

PMCNumber specifies the start address of the PMC number.

Count specifies the number of the PMC data you want to write. But the

maximum is “32”.

PMCData points to the array where the PMC data is written. The array

must be composed of the four-byte integral elements of the same number

as Count specifies.

You set the PMC data to PMCData. The PMC data must be set in only

the least significant byte of the four-byte integer. Three higher order

bytes must be set to the value of 0.

Refer to “Reading PMC Data” for the way to write the PMC data to

PMCData.

2 F_WritePMCData doesn’t return until the request is finished. You can

know whether the function has succeeded or not by the return value.

3 F_WritePMCEx requests the system to write the PMC data, and returns

at once. The return value is the descriptor ID for pointing the result. You

must check whether the request is finished or not, and whether its result

is success or not by using F_Response.

4 Call F_FreeID to free the descriptor ID return by F_WritePMCEx

after the request is finished.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_WritePMCData succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

F_WritePMCDataEx returns a descriptor ID of the positive integer for

pointing the result if it succeeds. If it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-148-

4.3.19 Reading NC Parameters < F_ReadParameter >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function ReadParameter

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ParameterNumber As Long, ByVal DataFormat As Long,

ByVal ParameterAxis As Long) As Long

VC++ LONG F_ReadParameter

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ParameterNumber, LONG DataFormat,

LONG ParameterAxis);

The function names in the above example are for a case where processing is

carried out synchronously. The function names for when processing is carried

out asynchronously become F_ReadParameterEx. The type of argument and

return value is the same in both synchronous and asynchronous processing.

The description F_ReadParameter(Ex) indicates both synchronous and

asynchronous processing.

VB Function CopyParameter (ByVal ID As Long, Parameter As Long) As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_CopyParameter (LONG ID, Long* Parameter);

DESCRIPTION

Proceed to 1, 2 and 4 to 7 in the case of synchronous processing.

Proceed to 1 and 3 to 7 in the case of synchronous processing.

1 F_ReadParameter(Ex) reads parameters from the NC having the machine

number specified by MachineNumber and tool post number specified by

ToolPostNumber.

For ParameterNumber, specify the number of the parameter to be read;

for DataFormat, the data format of the parameter to be read; and for

ParamaterAxis, the data of which axis to be read when the parameter to

be read is an axis type.

Set the following values according to the data format of the parameter to

be read in DataFormat.

Data Format Data Format of Parameter to be Read

1 Bit type

2 Byte type

3 Word type

4 2-word type

For details on the data format of the parameter to be read, refer to the NC

Instruction Manual.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-149-

If the parameter to be read is not an axis type, specify ParameterAxis as "0".

If the parameter to be read is an axis type, set an OR-ed value of the following

bit flags to ParameterAxis.

Bit Axis Whose Parameter Is To be Read

0 1st axis

1 2nd axis

2 3rd axis

3 4th axis

4 5th axis

5 6th axis

6 7th axis

7 8th axis

8 9th axis

9 10th axis

10 11th axis

11 12th axis

12 13th axis

13 14th axis

14 15th axis

15 (not used)

2 F_ReadParameter is a synchronous process. So, there is no return value

from the function until processing ends. The return value is used for

judging whether processing succeeded or failed.

If processing is successful, the return value becomes the descriptor ID to

the parameter.

3 F_ReadParameteEx is an asynchronous process. So, there is a return

value from the function immediately after processing is requested. The

return value becomes the descriptor ID to the parameter.

When F_Response is executed, whether or not processing ends lets you

know where processing succeeded or failed.

4 When the parameter is read successfully, the following process can be

carried out.

5 When F_CopyParameter is executed, the value of the read parameter can

be obtained.

Set the value of the descriptor ID, the return value of

F_ReadParameter(Ex), to ID.

The value of the read parameter is copied to Parameter. Even if the

parameter is an axis type or not, set the pointer to the 16-element x 4-

byte integer array.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-150-

F-CopyParameter extracts the parameter from the information specified

by the descriptor ID and copies it to Parameter.

6 If the parameter is not an axis type, the value is copied to element 0 of

the parameter.

If the parameter is an axis type, specify the axis to be read according to

the bit flag position in the ParameterAxis argument of

F_ReadParameter(Ex). The position (0 to 15) of this bit flag corresponds

to the element number (0 to 15) of the array parameter.

For example if bit 0 is raised in ParameterAxis, the value of the 1st axis

is copied to element 0 of the array parameter. Nothing is written to

elements in the array that correspond to bit positions whose

ParameterAxis bit flag is not raised.

7 When copying of the parameter value ends, execute F_FreeID to release

the descriptor ID.

RETURN VALUE

F_ReadParameter returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds. If it

fails, a value of 0 is returned.

F_ReadParameterEx returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds. If

it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

TRUE is returned if F_CopyParameter succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4-byte integer

Parameter�

Always 16 elements

NOTE

Reading of bit type data is carried out in byte units; reading of only

specified bits is not possible. Judge which bit is required from the data

that is read in byte units.

NOTE

This function cannot be used on DNC2. (It is scheduled to be

supported in the future.)

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-151-

4.3.20 Writing NC Parameters < F_WriteParameter >

SYNOPSIS

In the case of synchronous processing

VB Function WriteParameter

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ParameterNumber As Long, ByVal DataFormat As Long,

ByVal ParameterAxis As Long, Parameter As Long) As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_WriteParameter

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ParameterNumber, LONG DataFormat,

LONG ParameterAxis, LONG *Parameter );

In the case of asynchronous processing

VB Function WriteParameterEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ParameterNumber As Long, ByVal DataFormat As Long,

ByVal ParameterAxis As Long, Parameter As Long) As Long

VC++ LONG F_WritePMCDataEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ParameterNumber, LONG DataFormat,

LONG ParameterAxis, Long *Parameter );

The description “F_WriteParameter(Ex)” means both synchronous and

asynchronous processing.

DESCRIPTION

Read 1 and 2 in the case of synchronous processing.

Read 1, 3 and 4 in the case of synchronous processing.

1 F_WriteParameter(Ex) writes parameters to the NC having the machine

number specified by MachineNumber and tool post number specified by

ToolPostNumber.

For ParameterNumber, specify the number of the parameter to be

written; for DataFormat, the data format of the parameter to be written;

and for ParamaterAxis, the data of which axis to be written when the

parameter to be written is an axis type.

Specify the values of the parameters to be written to the NC in Parameter.

In parameter, set the pointer to the 16-element x 4-byte integer array.

For details on how to set values to DataFormat, ParameterAxis and

Parameter, see “4.3.19 Reading Parameters.”

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-152-

2 F_WriteParameter is a synchronous process. So, there is no return value

from the function until processing ends. The return value is used for

judging whether processing succeeded or failed.

3 F_WriteParameteEx is an asynchronous process. So, there is a return

value from the function immediately after processing is requested. The

return value becomes the descriptor ID to the processing results.

When F_Response is executed, whether or not processing ends lets you

know where processing succeeded or failed.

4 When processing ends, execute F_FreeID to release the descriptor ID.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_WriteParameter succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_WriteParameterEX returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds.

If it fails, a value of 0 is returned.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

NOTE

Writing of bit type data is carried out in byte units; writing of only

specified bits is not possible. During writing of bit type data, read the

parameter area in which the bit to write belongs as a bit type

specification, and write that parameter as a bit type specification after

changing the bits that require changing.

NOTE

This function cannot be used on DNC2. (It is scheduled to be

supported in the future.)

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-153-

4.3.21 Computer Start DNC Operation < F_Dnc... >

This function is valid only for machines connected by DNC1/Ethernet.

There are four ways of specifying the file for DNC operation as described in

section 1.3: by "file number," "file name," "NC program number" and "full

path of file." Each method has synchronous and asynchronous processing

modes.

The DNC operation procedure on the series 16i/18i:

(1) Turn the NC's DNC1 signal to ON, and then set the NC to the MEM

mode. The NC enters the RMT mode.

(2) Cycle start the NC. The MDI screen displays RMT-START.

(3) DNC operation is started on the NC by transferring the desired

program for DNC operation from your computer by the F_Dnc

function.

SYNOPSIS

<Specifying the file for DNC operation by its file number>

In the case of synchronous processing

VB Function DncFileNumber

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_DncFileNumber

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG FileNumber);

In the case of asynchronous processing

VB Function DncFileNumberEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileNumber As Long) As Long

VC++ LONG F_DncFileNumberEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG FileNumber);

NOTE

When DNC1/Ethernet is used, DNC operation is canceled by pressing

the RESET key during DNC operation started on your computer.

Transfer is not canceled even if the RESET key is pressed on the NC

during download or upload processing for startup on your computer.

Transfer, however, can be canceled using the cancel functions

"F_DownloadCancel" and "F_UploadCancel" on your computer.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-154-

<Specifying the file for DNC operation by its file name>

In the case of synchronous processing

VB Function DncFileName

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileName As String) As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_DncFileName

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FileName);

In the case of asynchronous processing

VB Function DncFileNameEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FileName As String) As Long

VC++ LONG F_DncFileNameEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FileName);

<Specifying the file for DNC operation by NC program number>

In the case of synchronous processing

VB Function DncONumber

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_DncONumber

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

In the case of asynchronous processing

VB Function DncONumberEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal ONumber As Long) As Long

VC++ LONG F_DncONumberEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LONG ONumber);

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-155-

<Specifying the file for DNC operation by its full path>

In the case of synchronous processing

VB Function DncFilePath

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FilePath As String) As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_DncFileName

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FilePath);

In the case of asynchronous processing

VB Function DncFilePathEx

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long,

ByVal FilePath As String) As Long

VC++ LONG F_DncFileNameEx

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber,

LPCTSTR FilePath);

The description “F_Dnc...” indicates synchronous processing of the above

four types of functions.

The description “F_Dnc...Ex” indicates asynchronous processing of the above

four types of functions.

The description “F_Dnc...(Ex)” indicates both synchronous and asynchronous

processing.

DESCRIPTION

Read 1 and 2 in the case of synchronous processing.

Read 1, 3 and 4 in the case of synchronous processing.

1 F_Dnc...(Ex) transfers NC program files from your computer to the NC

for DNC operation. The following table shows the four ways of

specifying the file for DNC operation.

Method of Specification Name of Function

File number F_DncFileNumber(Ex)

File name F_DncFileName(Ex)

NC program number F_DncONumber(Ex)

Full path of file F_DncFilePath(Ex)

There are MachineNumber and ToolPostNumber for the common

argument.

For MachineNumber, specify the machine number.

For ToolPostNumber, specify the tool post number.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-156-

At F_DncFileNumber(Ex), specify the file number by FileNumber. Any

value from 1 to 9999 can be specified.

At F_DncFileName(Ex), specify the file name by FileName.

At F_DncONumber(Ex), specify the NC program by ONumber.

At D_DncFilePath(Ex), specify the full path of the file by FilePath.

Section 1.3 describes the rules for transferring NC programs specified by

“file number,” “file name” and “NC program number.”

When files to be transferred are specified by “file order”, specified files

in ASCII sorted order are subject to DNC operation.

When files are specified by “file name,” files having the same name are

subject to DNC operation.

When files are specified by “NC program number,” files having a name

in the format “Oxxxx” (xxxx: specified NC program number) followed

by an extension are subject to DNC operation.

When files are specified by “full path of file,” files having the full

specified path are transferred regardless of the above rules.

2 F_Dnc... is a synchronous process. So, there is no return value from the

function until DNC operation ends. The return value is used for judging

whether processing succeeded or failed.

3 F_Dnc... is an synchronous process. So, there is a return value from the

function immediately after DNC operation is requested. The return value

becomes the descriptor ID to the processing results.

When F_Response is executed, whether or not processing ends lets you

know where processing succeeded or failed.

4 When processing ends, execute F_FreeID to release the descriptor ID.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Dnc... succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

F_Dnc...Ex returns a descriptor ID to the parameter if it succeeds. If it fails, a

value of 0 is returned.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-157-

4.3.22 Canceling Computer Start Download < F_DownloadCancel >

This function is valid only for machines connected by DNC1/Ethernet.

This function cancels the download that is started by starting up your

computer.

SYNOPSIS

VB Function DownloadCancel

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long)

As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_ DownloadCancel

(LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

DESCRIPTION

1 F_DownloadCancel ends the process that was downloaded by computer

startup to the NC having the machine number specified by

MachineNumber and tool post number specified by ToolPostNumber.

2 The cancel request is reset before the download is started even if it is

started after F_DownloadCancel is executed. So, the download is not

canceled.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_DownloadCancel succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

If the specified machine is not in the process, FALSE is returned.

NOTE

1 To use this function, you must execute the download of the NC

program requested by the computer asynchronously. If the download

is executed synchronously, the application will not be returned to until

the download function ends. For this reason, the cancel function

cannot be used.

2 Processing at normal completion of this function differs from

cancellation of an actual download. Make sure that the asynchronous

download function ended by a cancel by the F_Response function

(error code 0x6000012c).

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-158-

4.3.23 Canceling Computer Start Upload < F_UploadCancel >

This function is valid only for machines connected by DNC1/Ethernet.

This function cancels the upload that is started by starting up your computer.

SYNOPSIS

VB Function UploadCancel

(ByVal MachineNumber As Long, ByVal ToolPostNumber As Long)

As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_ UploadCancel (LONG MachineNumber, LONG ToolPostNumber);

DESCRIPTION

1 F_UploadCancel ends the process that was uploaded by computer startup to

the NC having the machine number specified by MachineNumber and

tool post number specified by ToolPostNumber.

2 The cancel request is reset before the upload is started even if it is started

after F_UploadCancel is executed. So, the upload is not canceled.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_UploadCancel succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

If the specified machine is not in the process, FALSE is returned.

NOTE

1 To use this function, you must execute the upload of the NC program

requested by the computer asynchronously. If the upload is executed

synchronously, the application will not be returned to until the upload

function ends. For this reason, the cancel function cannot be used.

2 Processing at normal completion of this function differs from

cancellation of an actual upload. Make sure that the asynchronous

upload function ended by a cancel by the F_Response function (error

code 0x6000012c).

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-159-

4.4 DIAGNOSIS AND OTHER SERVICES

4.4.1 Initialization Processing < F_Begin >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function Begin() As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_Begin(void);

DESCRIPTION

F_ Begin executes initialization processing of this library. Execute this

function before you use this library.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Begin succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4.4.2 Getting Number of Data < F_GetCount >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function GetCount(ByVal ID As Long, Count As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_GetCount(LONG ID, LONG* Count);

DESCRIPTION

F_GetCount counts the data associated with the descriptor ID, and places

the count number in the buffer pointed to by Count.

The contents of count data are different according to the specified descriptor

ID. Refer to the explanation of each function returning the descriptor ID.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_GetCount succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-160-

4.4.3 Moving Offset Location of Data < F_Seek >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function Seek

(ByVal ID As Long, ByVal Offset As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Seek(LONG ID, LONG Offset);

DESCRIPTION

F_Seek movies the offset location of the data to Offset.

The data is different according to the specified descriptor ID. Refer to the

explanation of each function returning the descriptor ID.

When the value of 0 is set to Offset, the offset location is moved to the first

data. When the (Count of F_GetCount �1) is set, it is moved to the last

data.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Seek succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

In failure, an error code can be acquired when F_GetLastError is carried

out.

4.4.4 Freeing Descriptor ID < F_FreeID >

SYNOPSIS

VB Sub FreeID(ByVal ID As Long)

C++ void F_FreeID(LONG ID);

DESCRIPTION

F_FreeID frees the Descriptor ID specified by ID. The descriptor ID must be

freed after using it.

After carrying out the function, you can’t access the data associated with the

freed descriptor ID.

RETURN VALUE

This function doesn’t have the return value.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-161-

4.4.5 Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment < F_Response >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function Response

(ByVal ID As Long, Result As Long, ErrorCode As Long) As Boolean

C++ BOOL F_Response(LONG ID, LONG* Result, LONG* ErrorCode);

DESCRIPTION

F_Response places the result of a treatment associated with the descriptor

ID in the buffer specified by Result.

If the result is “0”, the treatment isn’t finished.

If the result is “1”, the treatment is finished successfully.

If the result is “2”, the treatment is finished in failure.

When the result is “2”, the error code is set to the buffer specified by

ErrorCode. Make sure to check ErrorCode of this function when an

asynchronous function is finished in failure. In that case, you can’t check the

error code by using F_GetLastError.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_Response succeeds, FALSE is returned if it fails.

If F_Response is finished in failure, an error code can be acquired by using

F_GetLastError.

4.4.6 Getting Error Code < F_GetLastError >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function F_GetLastError() As Long

C++ DLONG F_GetLastError(void);

DESCRIPTION

F_GetLastError returns the error code. The error code indicates the cause

of the latest failed function in one application program.

When an application program consists of more than one “thread”, the last

failed function in all the threads causes the error code returned by

F_GetLastError. Note the design for the application program, including

several threads.

If a function is finished in failure, the error code indicates the cause of the

failure.

RETURN VALUE

The error code is returned.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-162-

4.4.7 End of FA LIBRARY < F_End >

SYNOPSIS

VB Sub End()

C++ void F_End(void);

DESCRIPTION

F_End terminates FA LIBRARY. Call this function when an application

program is finished. After this function is carried out, an application program

can’t call the functions of FA LIBRARY.

RETURN VALUE

This function doesn’t have the return value.

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-163-

4.5 LOG LIBRARY

This section describes the interface specifications relating to the functions

provided by the log library of FA SYSTEM for PC.

FA SYSTEM for PC creates various logs for monitoring operation. (Details of

these logs are described in “5. Monitoring FA SYSTEM for PC.”) All of these

logs are managed and created by the “LogServer” program. For this reason,

the LogServer must be started before you start FA SYSTEM for PC. The log

library starts and terminates this LogServer.

When Is Log Library required?

The log library functions are not used when FA SYSTEM for PC is started

from the [FA System] icon. This is because log library is automatically

executed to start the LogServer when the [FA System] icon is started.

To call each of the FA LIBRARY functions individually without using the

[FA System] icon (that is, to directly use the F_CreateCommunication and

F_Open functions), start the LogServer from the log library, and then use FA

LIBRARY.

Log Library Call Method

The log library is a module separate from FA LIBRARY. Start log library

from VB and VC++ as follows.

When starting from VB, the log library is supplied by “OLE Automation”. For

this reason, create an “object” by the function CreatObject(), and call the

“method” of that “object”. The name used when creating the “object” is

“LogClient.Library”.

When starting from VC++, the log library is supplied by “DLL”. The library

is not a class. For this reason, each function is called directly.

FA LIBRARY and Log Library Call Order

To call each function individually such as in the sample program without

using the [FA System] icon, start the LogServer from the log library, and use

FA LIBRARY.

To terminate the functions, terminate FA LIBRARY, and then shut down the

LogServer from the log library.

The following shows an example of how to do this in the FComTVB sample

program.

4. FA LIBRARY B-75044EN/02

-164-

Starting the LogServer by the log library

Set LogLib = CreateObject("LogClient.Library")

Rtn = LogLib.InvokeLogServer("")

'FA library start processing

Set FALib = CreateObject("FanucCom.Library")

Rtn = FALib.Begin() 'Initialization

Rtn = FALib.CreateCommunication() 'Start of communication

process

'Execute FA library services.

'FA library termination processing

FALib.TerminateCommunication("") ''Termination of

communication process

FALib.End 'End processing

Set FALib = Nothing

Terminating the LogServer by the log library

LogLib.TerminateLogServer

Set LogLib = Nothing

B-75044EN/02 4. FA LIBRARY

-165-

4.5.1 Starting LogServer < F_InvokeLogServer >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function InvokeLogServer(ByVal LogServerDir As String) As Long

VC++ LONG F_InvokeLogServer(LPCTSTR LogServerDir);

DESCRIPTION

F_InvokeLogServer starts the LogServer (LogSvr.exe).

Set "" to LogServeDir when FA SYSTEM for PC is installed and the

LogServer location has not been moved. When "" is set, the LogServer in the

installation directory of FA SYSTEM for PC is started.

(The LogServer is installed to "C: Fpfasys Bin" assuming that "C: Fpfasys" is

the directory in which FA SYSTEM for PC is installed.)

When the LogServer has been moved, set its drive name and directory name.

For example, let's assume that the LogServer has been moved to

"D:¥YourApp". In this case, set either of the following depending on whether

you programmed in VC++ or VB:

F_InvokeLogServer("D: YourApp"); (VC++)

LogLib.InvokeLogServer("D: YourApp"); (VB)

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_InvokeLogServer succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

4.5.2 Terminating LogServer < F_TerminateLogServer >

SYNOPSIS

VB Function TerminateLogServer() As Boolean

VC++ BOOL F_TerminateLogServer(void);

DESCRIPTION

F_TerminateLogServer terminates the LogServer.

RETURN VALUE

TRUE is returned if F_TerminateLogServer succeeds, FALSE is returned if it

fails.

If processing fails, an error code can be acquired by calling F_GetLastError.

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-166-

5 OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

FA SYSTEM for PC reports the status of itself. When an event is occurred

and an operator needs to handle it immediately, the message appears in the

computer display. When the operator doesn’t need to handle the event at once,

the message is written in the log file without preventing him�or her from

working the job.

The Log Viewer is the tool for displaying the contents of the log file.

The Log Viewer can be started by double-clicking the [Log Viewer] program

in the [FA System for PC] group.

B-75044EN/02 5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-167-

5.1 LOG VIEWER

5.1.1 About Log Message

The log messages are classified according to the source and the type of

messages as follows.

(1) Source of Messages

� FA LIBRARY

Messages related to FA LIBRARY.

The information of NC PROGRAM MANAGE-MENT is included

here because NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT is programmed by

using FA LIBRARY.

� DNC1

Messages related to DNC1 communication.

� DNC2

Messages related to DNC2 communication.

� Reader/Puncher

Messages related to Reader/Puncher.

� DNC/Ethernet

Messages related to DNC1/Ethernet communication.

� Communication process

Messages related to the communication management.

� Database server

Messages related to the database of FA SYSTEM for PC.

(2) Type of Message

� Transmission Message

Messages related to the download/upload of NC programs.

� Error Message

Errors of FA SYSTEM for PC.

� Internal Message

The internal status of FA SYSTEM for PC.

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-168-

Therefore, there are the ten log files. (File names are put in parentheses.)

� Transmission log (TransLog)

� Error log of FA LIBRARY (FComLibErrLog)

� Internal log of FA LIBRARY (FComLibDetailLog)

� Error log of DNC1 (DNC1ErrLog)

� Internal log of DNC1 (DNC1DetailLog)

� Error log of DNC2 (DNC2ErrLog)

� Internal log of DNC2 (DNC2DetailLog)

� Error log of Reader/Puncher (RPErrLog)

� Internal log of Reader/Puncher (RPDetailLog)

� Error log of DNC1/Ethernet communication (D1EErrLog)

� Internal log of DNC1/Ethernet communication (D1EDetailLog)

� Error log of communication process (MNGErrLog)

� Internal log of communication process (MNGDetailLog)

The latest 2000 messages are saved in each log file. These files are placed in

the “LOG” sub-directory under the directory which FA SYSTEM for PC is

installed in.

B-75044EN/02 5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-169-

5.1.2 The Contents of Transmission Log File

The following shows the display of the transmission log.

� START

The time when the transfer of NC program is started.

� END

The time when the transfer of NC program is finished.

� FUNCTION

Indicates the type of the transfer.

� Machine

Indicates the machine which an NC program is transferred to.

� RESULT

Indicates the result.

If the transfer is succeeded, a “OK” is displayed. If it is failed, the

error code of FA SYSTEM for PC is displayed. As for error codes ,

refer to “C. Error Code”.

� COMMENTS

Indicates the comment such as the file name of the transferred NC

program.

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-170-

5.1.3 The Contents of Log File

All log files are shown as the same display format by using the Log Viewer

screen. The following example shows the display of the “DNC2ErrLog” file.

� NO

The machine number which the event is occurred in.

� LEVEL

”00” indicates an error.

Other values indicate the normal processing status. The larger the

value is, the more the information is described in detail.

� DATE

The date when the event was occurred.

� COMMENTS

Indicates the comments of the event.

In case of error, the head of message is;

ERROR: (XXXXXXXXh/YYYY)

Where, “XXXXXXXX” indicates an eight character hexadecimal

number, and means the error code of FA SYSTEM for PC. For

more information of error codes, refer to “C. Error Code”.

“YYYY” indicates a four character decimal number, and means the

error code of Windows API(Application Programming Interface)

function which is the cause of the failure of FA SYSTEM for PC.

B-75044EN/02 5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-171-

5.1.4 About Log Viewer

By giving the example of the transmission log, this section describes how to

use Log Viewer.

Menu Bar Tool Bar Title Bar

Form Status Bar

Title Bar

The title of log file is displayed in Title Bar. When the search function is used,

the search condition appears at the same time.

The title bar in case that the machine number “7” is searched

Menu Bar

Menu Bar contains “File”, “Display”, “Option”, and “Help” menus.

Tool Bar

By using the list box, you can select the log file you want to display.

And by clicking the buttons, you can execute such commands as the print,

update, monitor, and search.

Form

The contents of the log file are displayed.

The latest 2000 messages can be saved in the log files. And the Log Viewer

can display messages as many as you set the value to [View Record Number]

command of the [Option] menu. The default value is 200.

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-172-

Status Bar

Status Bar usually displays the latest updated time and the number of

displayed messages.

While the Log Viewer is updating the display, the progress bar is displayed.

The latest updated time and monitoring message is displayed while the

monitor.

The ordinary displayed status bar

The status bar while the Log Viewer is updated.

The status bar on monitoring

5.1.5 Using Log Viewer

Opening the log file

1 Click the [Open] command in the [File] menu. The [Open] dialog box

will appear.

2 Select the log file you want to see from the list. The contents of the

selected file is displayed.

3 When you want to see other files, repeat the above step 1. You can

execute more than one the Log Viewer screen at the same time.

You can open the log file by using the list box instead.

Copying the Log

1 Click the [Copy] command of the [File] menu. The [Copy] dialog box

will appear.

2 Select the directory, and enter the file name.

Click the <OK> button. The contents of the log file are saved in your

named file.

B-75044EN/02 5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-173-

Cleaning up the Log File

- Click the [Clear] command of the menu. The contents of the log file are

cleaned up.

Printing the Log Messages

The way that the messages are selected by using a record number

1 Click the [Print] command of the [File] menu. The [Print] dialog box will

appear.

Or click the [Print] button, the [Print] dialog box will appear.

2 Enter the beginning and ending records you want to print.

3 Click the <OK> button. The selected messages are printed.

The way that the messages are selected by using a mouse

1 By using a mouse, drag the messages you want to print.

2 Click the [Print] command of the [File] menu. The [Print] dialog will

appear.

Click the [Print] button instead, the [Print] dialog box will appear.

The beginning and ending records have been entered automatically in the

[Print] dialog box.

3 Click the <OK> button. The dragged messages are printed.

NOTE

The cleared contents cannot be undone.

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-174-

Selecting a Font

1 Click the [Print] command in the [File] menu. The [Print] dialog will

appear.

2 Click the <Font setting> button. The [Font setting] dialog will appear.

3 Select the font you want to use.

Please select a small font size if possible.

4 Click the <OK> button. The selected font is registered.

Setting a Printer

1 Click the [Printer setting] command of the [File] menu. The [Printer

setting] dialog will appear.

2 Set up printer settings if you want. Please select a broad size paper if

possible.

3 Click the <OK> button. The printer settings are registered.

Changing the view of Tool Bar

1 Click the [Tool bar] command of the [Display] menu. The view of the

tool bar is changed.

When a check mark is set, the tool bar is displayed.

When a check mark is cleared, the tool bar is not displayed.

Changing the view of Status Bar

1 Click the [Status bar] command of the [Display] menu. The view of the

status bar is changed.

When a check mark is set, the status bar is displayed.

When a check mark is cleared, the status bar is not displayed.

Monitoring the Log Viewer

1 Click the [Monitor] command of the [Display] menu. The monitor state

of the Log Viewer is changed.

When a check mark is set, the Log Viewer updates the log information

periodically.

When a check mark is cleared, the monitoring is not executed.

Click the [Monitor] button instead. The monitoring state is changed.

NOTE

If the printer can not support the registered parameter, it is ignored.

B-75044EN/02 5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-175-

Searching the Log Message

The way that the message is searched by using the menu

1 Click the [Search] command of the [Display] menu. The sub menu will

appear.

Sub Menu

2 Click the item you want to search from the sub menu. The [Search]

dialog box will appear.

In case that the machine number is selected

3 Enter the item you want to search, and click the <OK> button. The

selected log information is displayed.

The way that the message is searched by using the button

You can search the log information by using the button instead.

NOTE

1 When the monitor is executed, you can not use the function except for

the [End], [ Stop the monitor], and [Change the monitor interval]

command. The horizontal scroll bar can be used in monitoring, but the

vertical scroll bar can not be used.

2 If the monitor interval is too short, a computer may be overloaded.

Please set up intervals of over ten seconds.

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-176-

Updating the Log Message

The way that the message is updated by using the menu

1 Click the [Renewal Log] command of the [Display] menu. The newest

information is displayed.

The way that the message is updated by using the button

Click the [Renewal Log] button instead. The contents of the Log Viewer

are updated automatically.

Setting the Monitor Interval

1 Click the [Monitor Interval] command of the [Option] menu. The

[Monitor interval] dialog box will appear.

2 Enter the interval, and click the <OK> button. The interval value is

registered. The value ranges from one second to 120 seconds.

Setting the Number of Messages

1 Click the [View Record Number] command in the [Option] menu. The

[View Record Number] dialog box will appear.

2 Enter the number of messages, and click the <OK> button. The value is

registered. The value ranges from one message to 2000 messages.

NOTE

The search command can search the log information displayed in the

Log Viewer.

Note that all contents of the log file are not searched.

NOTE

1 If the monitor interval is too short, a computer may be overloaded.

Please set up the interval of over ten seconds.

2 The interval can be set for each Log Viewer.

NOTE

1 If the number of messages is too many, a computer may be

overloaded. Please set up a number under 200 messages.

2 The value can be set for each Log Viewer.

B-75044EN/02 5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC

-177-

5.2 LogServer

The LogServer receives the various log writing requests on the FA SYSTEM

for PC and creates a log file.

5.2.1 Setting log creation ON/OFF

LogServer allows you to set whether or not to create log files for each log. If

you execute FA LIBRARY functions in short cycles, the load placed on the

PC is increased as detailed logs for the FA LIBRARY and communication

process are frequently created. If this happens, you can reduce the load placed

on the system by not creating detailed logs, and creating only error logs.

If you disable the creation of detailed logs, the settings will be reflected

immediately without the need to restart FA SYSTEM for PC. The settings are

saved, so the settings are valid even when FA SYSTEM for PC is started next.

The procedure for setting log creation ON/OFF by Log Server is as follows:

1 The LogServer that was started as an icon is displayed as a window.

2 Expand the tree view to display the log name.

3 A log having a log name prefixed by “(*)” will be created.

Each click turns the display of the “*” ON and OFF, and switches

creation of the log ON and OFF. When you have finished setting log

creation, return the LogServer to its original icon.

NOTE

If you set LogServer so that a detailed log is not created, you may not

be able to parse the details of operation that was being carried out

when the error occurred. Check operation thoroughly before you

disable the creation of detailed logs.

5. OBSERVATION OF FA SYSTEM FOR PC B-75044EN/02

-178-

The following example disables

creation of the following detailed logs

to read data at a short cycle using

DNCI/Ethernet:

� Communication manager

(MngDetailLog)

� FA LIBRARY (FComlibDetailLog)

� DNC1/Ethernet (D1EDetailLog)

For details on the log displayed on the

left, see “5.1.1 Log information.”

B-75044EN/02 6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

-179-

6 LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

Two or more NC programs can be registered to a List File and transferred.

(For details on the List File transfer function, refer to “1.6 List File Transfer

Function.”)

Two screens are provided for managing List Files:

1 Edit List File screen

Screen for creating and editing List Files

2 List File Monitor screen

Screen for monitoring transfers made using List Files.

The chapter describes how to operate from these screens.

NOTE

Transfer by List File can be used only when the Reader/Puncher

interface protocol is in use.

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-180-

6.1 EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS

The Edit List File screen is where you create and edit List Files.

To display the Edit List File screen, start [Edit List Files] in the [FANUC FA

System for PC] group dialog box.

You can also start [Edit List Files] from the NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT screen.

6.1.1 Structure of Edit List File Screen

The figure below shows the Edit List File screen and details when

LIST001.LST List File for machine number 1 is being edited.

B-75044EN/02 6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

-181-

Directory

Displays the machine name to which the List File currently being edited

belongs. The machine name is displayed in the following format:

“<3-digit machine number>.<machine name>”

Directory Name

Displays the directory in which the List File currently being edited is saved.

List File Name

Displays the name of the List File currently being edited.

Directory

List File name

Directory nameRegistration file directory

selection combo box

Contents of List File

List BoxRegistration file name

List Box

File type to be displayedin registration file name

list box

Buttons for changingorder/deleting

contents of List File

Buttons foradding/inserting from

registration file to List

File

Menu bar

O number used for

extended transfer

Number of records

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-182-

Registration File Directory Selection Combo Box

This combo box is for selecting the directory to be displayed in the [Register

File Name] list box.

When you select “Same directory as List File”, a list of files in the directory

currently displayed at [Directory Name] is displayed in the [Register File

Name] list box.

When you select “Different directory from List File”, a dialog box for

selecting the drive and directory appears.

File Type To Be Displayed in Registration File Name List Box

Selects the type of file to be displayed in the [Register File Name] list box.

Registration File Name List Box

Displays the file name to be registered to the List File.

Button for Adding/Inserting from Registration File to List File

The <Add> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the

[Register File Name] list box is selected. When you press the <Add> button,

the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is appended to the end of

the [List File Details] list box.

The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the

[Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to insert is selected in

the [List File Details] list box. When you press the <Insert> button, the file

selected in the [Register File Name] list box is inserted in front of the record

currently selected in the [Register File Name] list box.

List File Details List Box

Displays the details of the List Files currently being edited in the order in

which they are to be transferred.

[Instruct Transfer] displays the instruction details as such as [Pause] and

[Skip].

The names of registered NC program files are displayed in their full path at

[File Name].

Buttons for Changing Order/Deleting Contents of List File

These buttons are for changing the order of List Files and deleting List Files.

Each of these buttons are enabled by selecting a line in the [List File Details]

list box.

The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top.

The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record.

The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record.

The <End> button moves the selected record to the end of the records.

The <Delete> button deletes the selected record.

The <Delete All> button deletes all records.

B-75044EN/02 6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

-183-

O Number Used for Extended Transfer

In the extended transfer mode, the O number in the registered NC programs is

not transferred. If you check the [Specify O Number at Extended Transfer]

check box, the [O Number] text box is enabled, and the O number entered

here can be transferred. Enter a 4-digit number.

If you uncheck the [Specify O Number at Extended Transfer] check box, the

O number of the first file registered to the List File is transferred.

This setting is ignored in the separate transfer mode.

Number of Records

Displays the currently registered number of records.

6.1.2 Editing List Files

Creating New List Files

To create a new List File, click the [New] command in the [File] menu. The

[New] dialog box appears.

1 Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Directory] combo

box.

If you select a machine name in the [Directory] combo box, the default

directory of the machine selected in the [Directory Name] text box is

displayed.

If you select <Any Directory> in the [Directory] combo box, select the

directory by the button to the right of the [Directory Name] text box.

NOTE

Select the machine name at [Directory], and display the default

directory of the machine to communicate with at [Directory Name].

If you select <Any Directory> at [Directory], specify a directory other

than the default directory at the [Directory Name] button and create a

List File, you will no longer be able to call the List File from the NC.

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-184-

2 Enter the name of the new List File in the [List File] text box, and press

the <Start> button. The file name does not need a file extension. The List

File extension set in the Machine Setup screen is added to the file name

according to the machine selected in the [Directory] combo box.

To edit an existing file, enter the file name in the [List File] text box, and

press the <Start> button.

When you specify an existing file, a confirmation dialog box for

checking if it is OK to delete the file and create a new file appears.

Opening Existing List Files

To edit an existing List File, click the [Open] command in the [File] menu.

The [Open] dialog box appears.

1 Select the directory containing the List File in the [File Directory] combo

box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory Name] text box.

2 When you select the List File name from the list box, the List File name

selected in the [List File Name] text box is displayed.

You can also enter the List File name to edit directly in the [List File

Name] text box.

3 Press the <Open> button.

B-75044EN/02 6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

-185-

Registering NC Programs to Transfer to List Files

Use the <Add> or <Insert> buttons.

1 Select the file to register in the [Register File Name] list box.

2 The <Add> button is enabled when you select the file currently displayed

in the [Register File Name] list box. When you press the <Add> button,

the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is appended to the

end of the [List File Details] list box.

Instead of the <Add> button, you can also add files by double-clicking

the file to register in the [Register File Name] list box.

3 The <Insert> button is enabled when the file currently displayed in the

[Register File Name] list box is selected, and the record to insert is

selected in the [List File Details] list box. When you press the <Insert>

button, the file selected in the [Register File Name] list box is inserted in

front of the record currently selected in the [Register File Name] list box.

Changing the Transfer Order of List Files

Use the <Top>, <Up>, <Down> and <End> buttons.

1 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List

File Details] list box.

2 The <Top> button moves the selected record to the top.

The <Up> button moves the selected record up one record.

The <Down> button moves the selected record down one record.

The <End> button moves the selected record to the end of the records.

In addition to using the above buttons, you can also change the transfer order

by dragging and dropping by the mouse.

1 Press the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List File

Details] list box with the left mouse button to select.

2 If you move the mouse with the left mouse button held down, the “<”

mark appears at the beginning of the record you selected, and a blank

record prefixed with the “>” mark is inserted at the record where you

want to move the record to.

3 Release the left mouse button. The selected record is moved.

Example:

Inserting O0008

between O0005 andO0006.

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-186-

Deleting Records in List Files

Use the <Delete> or <Delete All> buttons.

1 Select the record you want to delete in the [List File Details] list box.

2 The <Delete> button deletes the selected records.

The <Delete All> button deletes all records.

Setting the Transfer Instructions to Each Record in the List File

Use the [Edit] menu.

To set the transfer instruction to a specified record, use the [Skip], [Pause]

and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] menu.

To set the transfer instruction to all records following a specified record, use

the [Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] - [Specify

All Subsequent Records] menu.

The meanings of the various commands are as follows:

� When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and transfer of

subsequent records is continued.

� When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following that record is

not carried out and transfer is paused. The pause state can be confirmed

in the List File Monitor screen. To cancel the pause, specify the [Cancel]

command in the List File Monitor screen.

Example of List File transfer Monitor screen

Example: Paused

� To cancel a [Skip] or [Pause] specification, use the [Cancel] command.

B-75044EN/02 6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

-187-

Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows:

1 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List

File Details] list box.

2 Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu.

In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer in the

context menu of the right mouse button.

1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you want to

change in the [List File Details] list box, and press the right mouse

button.

2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.

Registering Files in the Same Directory as List Files Using Only the File Name

Normally, the files to transfer to the List File are registered using their full

path.

The Option screen allows you to select whether to register only a file name or

register the file by its full path.

Specify registration by only a file name when you do not want to register a file

using its full path to copy a List File to another machine having a different

default directory.

To set this, click the [Option] command in the [Tool] menu.

NOTE

The meanings [Cancel] in Edit List File screen and [Cancel] in List File

Monitor screen are different.

� [Cancel] in Edit List File screen

[Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by all transmission using

specified List Files.

� [Cancel] in List File Monitor screen

[Skip] and [Pause] are canceled by only the List File currently

being transferred.

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-188-

In the List Files registered by only a file name, only the file name is displayed

even in the [List File Details] list box.

Overwriting List Files

To save the file currently being edited under the same name, click the

[Overwrite] command in the [File] menu.

Saving to List Files Under a New Name

To save the file currently being edited under a new name, click the [Save As]

command in the [File] menu. The [Save As] dialog box appears.

1 Select the directory for saving the List File from the [Directory] combo

box. The directory name is displayed in the [Directory Name] text box.

2 Enter the List File name that you want to save to from the [List File

Name] text box.

3 Click the <Save> button.

Exiting the Screen

Click the [Exit] Command in the [File] menu.

B-75044EN/02 6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

-189-

6.2 LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS

The List File Monitor screen automatically displays the transfer status

according to the List File at each monitor cycle.

6.2.1 Structure of List File Monitor Screen

The List File Monitor screen is as follows:

Monitor machine number and

machine name

Details of List Files

currently being transferred

Menu bar Original List File name

Monitor Machine Number and Machine Name

Select the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-190-

Original List File Name

The List File name created in the Edit List File screen is displayed.

Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.

Details of List Files Currently Being Transferred

This screen monitors and displays the status of List Files currently being

transferred at each monitor cycle described later.

� Transfer instruction

Displays the transfer instruction set in the Edit List File screen.

� File name

Displays the file name set in the Edit List File screen. The displayed

order is the transfer order.

� Transfer results

Displays the current transfer status:

“Transferred” Transfer of this record has ended.

“Skipped” This record has not been transferred, and the next record

has been processed.

“Paused” This record has not been transferred, and transfer has

been paused.

Specify [Cancel] to resume transfer.

Nothing is displayed if a List File is not being transferred.

6.2.2 List File Monitor Operations

Changing the Monitor Machine

Select the machine to monitor in the [Monitor Machine] combo box.

Changing the Monitor Cycle

If you execute the [Set Monitor Cycle] in the [Display] menu, the [Monitor

Cycle] dialog box appears. Drag the slider to change the monitor cycle, and

press the <OK> button.

The monitor cycle default is 10 seconds.

Updating to Latest Monitor Information

If you execute the [Set Monitor Cycle] in the [Display] menu, the latest

monitor information is displayed regardless of the monitor cycle.

B-75044EN/02 6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT

-191-

Pausing Monitor Display

To pause monitor display without exiting the screen, press the <Pause

Monitor> button. Each press of this button toggles between <Pause Monitor>

and <Start Monitor>.

Whether or not monitor is in progress is displayed on the screen's title bar. If

monitor is in progress, “List File Monitor – Monitoring” is displayed, and if

monitor is stopped, “List File Monitor - Monitor Stopped” is displayed.

Changing the Transfer Instruction

Change the transfer instruction, for example, to cancel the pause transfer

instruction or skip a non-transferred record in order to resume transfer of a

paused record.

To change the transfer instruction, use the [Skip], [Pause] and [Cancel]

commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] menu.

To set the same instruction to all records following a specified record, use the

[Skip] and [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] - [Instruct Transfer] - [Specify

All Subsequent Records] menu.

The meanings of the various commands are as follows:

� When you instruct [Skip], that record is not transferred, and transfer of

subsequent records is continued.

� When you instruct [Pause], transfer of all records following that record is

not carried out and transfer is paused.

Transfer by the [Edit] menu is specified as follows:

1 Select the record whose transfer order you want to change in the [List

File Details] list box.

2 Set the [Skip], [Pause] or [Cancel] commands in the [Edit] menu.

In addition to transfer by the [Edit] menu, you can also instruct transfer in the

context menu of the right mouse button.

1 Bring the mouse cursor to the record whose transfer order you want to

change in the [List File Details] list box, and press the right mouse

button.

2 The same menu as the [Edit] menu appears.

6. LIST FILE MANAGEMENT B-75044EN/02

-192-

Changing the Order, Adding and Deleting NC Programs to be Transferred

For all records following a paused record, you can change the order of NC

programs to be transferred, add and register new NC programs or delete NC

programs.

When you execute the [Edit List] command in the [Edit] menu, the Edit screen

appears. Operations in this screen are the same as in the Edit List File screen.

NOTE

The Edit screen displays records that were registered after the paused

record.

APPENDIX

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX A. SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS

-195-

A SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS

The following tables show the sample NC parameters.

When you set these parameters to the NC unit actually, refer to the NC

Operator’s manual.

Sample Parameters (DNC1)

Parameter

����Default Value����

Series 16/18 Series 15 Series 0

Input/output device number 0020=10 0020=4

0021=4

0022=4

0023=4

I/O=10

Connection type

����Multi-point)

0141=2 5061=2 0347=2

Station address

(2~17)

0142=2~17 5062=2~17 0348=2~17

Baud rate

(460.8Kbps)

0133=51 5060=51 0251=51

Whether the ISO code contains a parity bit

(With parity bit)

0000.1=1 0000.2=0 ISO=1

Punch code

(ISO)

0131.3=1 0000.4=0 0051.3=1

TV check

(Not checked)

TV=0 0000.0=0 TV=0

MAP Parameter screen

(Displayed)

- - 389.0=1

A. SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-196-

Sample Parameters (DNC2)

Parameters

����Default Value����

Series 16/18 Series 15 Series 0-MC Series0-TC

Input/output device 0020=10 0020=4

0021=4

0022=4

0023=4

I/O=10 I/O=10

RS232C stop bit

(2)

00131.0=1 5082=2 0051.0=1 0051.0=1

The ISO code contains a parity bit or not

(Without a parity bit)

0131.3=1 0000.2=1 0051.3=1 0051.3=1

Parity

����EVEN)

0134.1=1 5000.1=0 0051.1=1 0051.1=1

Whether to check CD in the RS232C

����Not checked����

0134.4=1 5000.4=1 0051.4=1 0051.4=1

Interface used between the host and NC

(RS232C)

0135.3=0 5000.0=0 0055.3=0 0055.3=0

Whether to check the BCC value

����Checked����

0140.0=0 5056.0=0 0396.0=0 0396.0=0

Whether to check the ER signal

����Checked����

0140.2=0 5056.2=0 0396.2=0 0396.2=0

Error code for negative response

����Negative response is indicated by an error code����

0140.3=1 5056.3=1 0396.3=1 0396.3=1

RS232C baud rate

(9600)

0133=11 5083=11 0251=11 0251=11

Timeout value for the no response timer

(5)

0143=5 5050=5 0365=5 0320=5

Timeout value for the EOT signal timer

(5)

0144=5 5051=5 0366=5 0321=5

Retry for an invalid transmission protocol or no

response

(5)

0145=5 5052=5 0368=5 0323=5

Retry for NAK

(3)

0146=3 5053=3 0369=3 0324=3

Max number of characters that can be received

(256)

0148=256 5054=256 0370=256 0325=256

Datagram length

(256)

0149=256 5055=256 0490=256 0490=256

MAP parameter screen

(Displayed)

- - 389.0=1 389.0=1

PMC data

����Data number order type����

- 4=1

(NOTE)

- -

End of block

����LF)

0100.3=1 0000.3=1 0070.7=1 0070.7=1

NOTE: When the PMC-NA unit (except for PMC-NA2) is used in Series 15,

this parameter must be set.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX A. SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS

-197-

Sample Parameters (Reader/Puncher)

Parameters

����Default Value����

Series 16/18 Series

10/11/12/15

Series 0

Input/output device

(1)

0020=0 0020=1

0021=1

I/O=0

Stop bit

(2)

0101.0=1 5111=2 0002.0=1

ISO code contains a parity bit or not

����With parity bit����

0101.3=0 0000.2=0 ISO=1

Reader/puncher device number 5001=1 0002.2=0

Specification No. of reader/puncher

(Floppy cassette)

0102=3 5110=8

(or��

0038.7=1

0038.6=1

Baud rate

����9600����

0103=11 5112=11 0552=11

TV check

����Checked����

0000.0=1 0000.0=1 TV=1

Punch code

����ISO����

0000.1=1 0000.4=0 ISO=1

TV check during control out

����checked����

0100.1=1 0000.1=0 0018.6=1

End of block

����LF)

0100.3=1 0000.3=1 0070.7=1

Feed

����Not punched����

0101.7=1 0002.7=1

O8000~O8999

(Cannot be edited)

3202.0=1 0011.0=1 0389.2=1

O9000~O9999

(Cannot be edited)

3202.4=1 2201.0=1 0010.4=1

Registering the program

����All programs are registered����

3201.1=0 2200.2=1 0045.1=0

Registering the program

(When programs are loaded without deleting the previously loaded

programs����

3201.0=0 2200.0=0 0045.0=0

If program is over-written

����Alarm is indicated����

3201.2=0 2200.1=0 0015.6=0

M02/M30/M99

����Not be assumed as program end����

3201.6=1 2200.3=1 0019.6=1

A. SAMPLE OF NC PARAMETER SETTINGS APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-198-

Sample parameters When DNC1/Ethernet Is Used As

Communication Protocol

Parameters

(Default Value)

Series 16i/18i

Input/output device number 0020=6

Required only during DNC operation

IP address Set the IP address assigned to the NC to be

connected.

Set this value to “NC IP Address2 in the Machine

Setup screen.

Sub net mask Set the subnet mask assigned to the NC to be

connected. No setting is provided for the Machine

Setup screen.

Router IP address Set the router IP address assigned to the NC to be

connected. No setting is provided for the Machine

Setup screen.

TCP port number Set the TCP port number assigned to the NC to be

connected.

Set this value to “NC TCP Port Number” in the

Machine Setup screen.

UDP port number Set the UDP port number assigned to the NC to be

connected. When two or more NCs are to be

connected, all values must be set to the same value.

Set the same value as the udp port in the

FANUC_C4_SERVER service that is entered to the

services file on your computer.

Time interval (the survival

signal is transmitted once

every 0.5 seconds)

This is the interval for the survival signal that is

transmitted from the NC. The interval is set in 10

ms. Set “50”.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-199-

B SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

The following shows the sample operations of NC.

When you operate an NC unit, refer to the NC Operator’s manual.

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-200-

B.1 DNC1, DNC2

Sample operations for FS16/18

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The NC program to be downloaded is selected by “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [OPRT] soft key.

4 Push the [+] soft key.

5 Push the [READ] soft key.

6 Input the “O????”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program

number you want to read.

7 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [OPRT] soft key.

4 Push the [+] soft key.

5 Push the [PUNCH] soft key.

6 Input “O????”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program number

you want to punch. It is also used for saving the uploaded program.

7 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-201-

Procedure for DNC Operation (NC Program Number)

The NC program is selected by “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “MDI”.

2 Push the <SYSTEM> function key.

3 Push the [+] soft key twice.

4 Push the [C-OPER] soft key. The following display will appear.

5 Push the [OPRT] soft key.

6 Push the [STRING] soft key.

7 Input “O????.PRG”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program

number.

8 Push the [INPUT] soft key.

9 Push the [STRING] soft key.

10 Change the NC mode to “Memory”.

11 Change the NC mode to “RMT” by raising the DNCI signal in the PMC

unit.

12 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.

[COMMUNICATION OPERATION]

[DNC FILE SELECTION]

-

>

MDI **** **** **** ****

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-202-

Sample Operations for FS15

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The NC program to be downloaded is selected by “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM]

soft key.

3 Push the�������������� soft key twice.

4 Push the [READ] soft key.

5 Input “,O????”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program number

you want to read. A “,” character can be inputted by pushing both the “#”

key and the shift key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM]

soft key.

3 Push the [�������� ] soft key twice.

4 Push the [PUNCH] soft key.

5 Input “,O????”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program number

you want to punch. It is also used for saving the uploaded program. A

“,” character can be inputted by pushing both the “#” key and the shift

key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-203-

Procedure for DNC Operation (NC Program Number)

The NC program is selected by “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “TAPE”.

2 Push the [SETTING] soft key.

3 Push the [CHAPTER] soft key twice.

4 Push the [COMMU.OPERAT] soft key. The following display will

appear.

5 Input “O????.PRG”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program

number.

6 Push the [INPUT] soft key.

7 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.

Sample Operations for FS0

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The NC program to be downloaded is selected by “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Push the [I/O]soft key.

4 Input “O????”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program number

you want to read.

5 Push the [READ] soft key.

COMMUNICATION OPERATION O0001 N0001

DNC FILE SELECTION

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-204-

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Push the [I/O] soft key.

4 Input “O????”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program number

you want to punch. It is also used for saving the uploaded program.

5 Push the [PUNCH] soft key.

Procedure for DNC Operation (NC Program Number)

The NC program is selected by “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “MDI”.

2 Push the <DGNOS PARAM> function key.

3 Push the [MAP] soft key. The following display will appear.

4 Push the [STRING] soft key.

5 Input “O????.PRG”. Where, the “????” indicates the NC program

number.

6 Push the <INPUT> function key.

7 Change the NC mode to “AUTO”.

8 Raise the DNCI signal in the PMC unit.

9 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.

To execute the DNC operation, raise the bit 0 of the NC parameter address

389.

The MAP PARAMETER display becomes active, and the SERVO SETTING

display becomes inactive.

[MAP PARAMETER] O0001 N0001

(SETTING)

DNC FILE SELECTION

NUM. MDI

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-205-

B.2 READER/PUNCHER

Sample Operation for FS16/18

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number)

The NC program to be downloaded is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [READ] soft key.

4 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number you want to read.

5 Push the [F-SET] soft key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “File Name”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [PUNCH] soft key.

4 Input “????”. Where, the “????” indicates the file name you want to

punch.

5 Push the [O-SET] soft key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-206-

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [PUNCH] soft key.

4 Input “????”. Where, the “????” indicates the file name.

5 Push the [O-SET] soft key.

6 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number.

7 Push the [F-SET] soft key.

8 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

The system can’t name the uploaded NC program by using the file number

which is inputted in the above step 6. But the system finds the NC program

number from the contents of the uploaded NC program and uses it as a file

name.

Procedure for displaying the List

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [FLOPPY] soft key.

4 Push the [OPRT] soft key.

5 Push the <PAGE�> and <PAGE�> key. The pages are turned .

Procedure for Deleting an NC Program

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [F-DEL] soft key.

4 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number you want to delete.

5 Push the [F-SET] soft key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-207-

Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number)

The NC program is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “RMT”.

2 Push the <PROG> function key.

3 Push the [FL.SDL] soft key.

4 Push the [OPRT] soft key.

5 Push the [SELECT] soft key.

6 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number.

7 Push the [F-SET] soft key.

8 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

9 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.

Sample Operations for FS10/11/12/15

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number)

The NC program to be downloaded is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM]

soft key.

3 Push the [READ] soft key.

4 Push the [FILE#] soft key.

5 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number you want to read.

6 Push the [ALL] soft key.

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Name)

The NC program to be downloaded is selected by “File Name”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM]

soft key.

3 Push the [READ] soft key.

4 Push the [FILE NAME] soft key.

5 Input “ABC�. Where, the “ABC�” indicates the file name you want

to read.

6 Push the [ALL] soft key.

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-208-

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “File Name”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM]

soft key.

3 Push the [PUNCH] soft key.

4 Push the [PROGRAM#] soft key.

5 Input “????”. Where, the “????” indicates the file name you want to

punch.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 To select the PROGRAM(MEMORY) display, push the [PROGRAM]

soft key.

3 Push the [PUNCH] soft key.

4 Push the [FILE#] soft key.

5 Input “??”.

6 Push the [THIS PROGRAM] soft key.

The system can’t name the uploaded NC program by using the file number

which is inputted in the above step 6. but the system finds the NC program

number from the contents of the uploaded NC program and uses it as a file

name.

Procedure for displaying the List

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the [PROG] soft key.

3 Push the [DRCTRY FLOPPY] soft key.

4 Push the <PAGE�> and <PAGE�> key. The pages are turned.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-209-

Procedure for Deleting an NC Program

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the [PROG] soft key.

4 Push the [DELETE] soft key.

5 Push the [FILE#] soft key.

6 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the NC program number you want

to delete.

7 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number)

The NC program is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Tape”.

2 Push the [PROG] soft key.

3 Push the [SEARCH] soft key.

4 Push the [FILE#] soft key.

5 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

7 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-210-

Sample Operation for FS0-C

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number)

The NC program to be downloaded is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Push the [READ]soft key.

4 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number you want to read.

5 Push the <INPUT> function key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “File Name”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Push the [PUNCH]soft key.

4 Input “????”. Where, the “????” indicates the file name you want to

punch.

5 Push the <INPUT> function key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (NC Program Number)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “NC Program Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Push the [PUNCH]soft key.

4 Input “????”.

5 Push the <INPUT> function key.

6 Input “??”.

7 Push the <INPUT> function key.

8 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

The system can’t name the uploaded NC program by using the file number

which is inputted in the above step 6. but the system finds the NC program

number from the contents of the uploaded NC program and uses it as a file

name.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-211-

Procedure for displaying the List

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Push the [FLOPPY] soft key.

4 Push the <PAGE�> and <PAGE�> key. The pages are turned.

Procedure for Deleting an NC Program

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Push the [DELETE] soft key.

4 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number you want to delete.

5 Push the <INPUT> function key.

6 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number)

The NC program is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “AUTO”.

2 Enter the DNC1 signal from the PMC, and set to the RMT mode.

3 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

4 Push the [FL.SDL] soft key.

5 Push the [SELECT] soft key.

6 Input “??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number.

7 Push the <INPUT> function key.

8 Push the [EXEC] soft key.

9 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.

B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-212-

Sample Operation for FS0-A/0-B

Procedure for Downloading an NC Program (File Number)

The downloading NC program is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Input “N??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number you want to

read.

4 Push the <INPUT> function key twice.

Procedure for Uploading an NC Program (File Name)

The uploaded NC program is saved by using “File Name”.

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Input “O????”. Where, the “O????” indicates the file name you want to

punch.

4 Push the <START> function key.

Procedure for Deleting an NC Program

1 Change the NC mode to “Edit”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Input “N??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number you want to

delete.

4 Push the <START> function key.

Procedure for DNC Operation (File Number)

The NC program is selected by “File Number”.

1 Change the NC mode to “AUTO”.

2 Push the <PRGRM> function key.

3 Input “N??”. Where, the “??” indicates the file number.

4 Push the <INPUT> function key.

5 When the cycle start signal is raised, the DNC operation is started.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX B. SAMPLE OPERATION FOR NC

-213-

B.3 DNC1/ETHERNET

FS16i/18i Operation Example

DNC Operation Procedure of NC Program (NC program number)

Determine the NC program to be run taking the NC program number as the

key.

1 Set the NC to the MEM mode.

2 Set the DNC1 signal on the PMC, and set to the RMT mode.

3 Start the NC by a cycle start. The NC displays RMT-START.

4 Download the NC program for DNC operation from your computer.

NOTE

1 NC start cannot be downloaded, uploaded or deleted on

DNC1/Ethernet. (These scheduled to be supported in the future.)

2 When DNC operation is carried out on DNC1/Ethernet, download from

your computer after executing a cycle start on the NC.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-214-

C ERROR CODE

The following error codes are returned by the F_GetLastError function of FA

LIBRARY.

Error Codes about General of Communication Process (0x00010000 ~ 0x0001ffff)

0x00010000 The system cannot terminate the communication process because more than

one machine is communicating with the computer.

Try again after all the machine communications are stopped.

0x00010001 The system cannot open the communication for the specified machine because

it is already communicating with the computer.

The communication of a machine cannot be opened twice.

0x00010002 The system is initializing the DNC1 internal process.

Try again after a short time.

0x00010003 The communication is not opened for the specified machine yet.

Check that the machine was opened correctly.

0x00010006 The communication is not opened for the specified machine yet.

It is possible that the system is not set up correctly.

Error Codes about DNC1 of Communication Process (0x00020000 ~ 0x0002ffff)

0x00020102 The specified machine number is illegal.

Check the machine number is set to the Machine Configuration screen.

0x00020106 During the execution of the function, the system received the request to stop

the DNC1 communication process.

The function is canceled.

0x00020107 The system is replying the other request for the specified machine.

Try again after a short time.

0x0002010c NC program number is illegal.

The range must be from 1 to 9999.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-215-

Error Codes about DNC2 of Communication Process (0x00030000 ~ 0x0003ffff)

0x00030103 The system cannot read the initial data stored in the registry of the computer.

It is possible that the system is not set up correctly.

0x00030201 The system cannot open the serial port.

Check that the specified machine is associated with the port correctly.

0x00030301 The negative response (reset error etc.) was sent from the NC side.

Check that the NC operation is not canceled by the reset, and an error is not

occurred in the NC side.

0x00030302 The ER line of RS232C was not raised.

Check that the NC unit is not turned off, and the RS232C cable is not

damaged.

0x00030409 During the communication, the system didn’t receive any reply from the NC

for a certain period of time.

Check that the NC doesn’t hang up.

0x00030411 The system received a negative response ( the reset error etc.) from the NC.

Check that the NC operation is not canceled by the reset, and an error is not

occurred in the NC side.

0x00030412 The ER line of RS232C was dropped.

Check that the NC is not turned off, and the RS232C cable is not

damaged.

0x00030413 The retry over of DNC2 was occurred.

If the system can not communicate with the NC from the first, check the

DNC2 parameters in both of the system and the NC.

If the error is occurred during the communication, check that the NC unit is

running without an alarm.

0x00030501 The internal error was occurred in the system.

Check that the socket interface of WindowsNT is effective.

It is possible that the system is not set up correctly.

0x00030502 The internal error was occurred in the system.

Check that the socket interface of WindowsNT is effective.

0x00030503 The internal error was occurred in the system.

Check that the communication process is running.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-216-

0x00030601 During the execution of a DNC2 command, the error was occurred.

Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter “Error code

for negative response” is inactive.

Set up the “Error code for negative response” parameter in the NC side.

0x00030602 The negative response of “T_NP” was sent from the NC side.

Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter “Error code

for negative response” is inactive.

Set up the “Error code for negative response” parameter in the NC side.

Where, “T_NP” and the following “T_BD”, “M_NR”, “N_NP”, “N_IL”

indicate the error types of DNC2 negative responses. For more information,

refer to Volume II “Protocol” in “FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS (B-

61992E)“.

0x00030603 The negative response of “T_BD” was sent from the NC side.

Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter “Error

code for negative response” is inactive.

Set up the “Error code for negative response” parameter in the NC side.

0x00030604 The negative response of “T_MR” was sent from the NC side.

Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter “Error code

for negative response” is inactive.

Set up the “Error code for negative response” parameter in the NC side.

0x00030605 The negative response of “N_NP” was sent from the NC side.

Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter “Error code

for negative response” is inactive.

Set up the “Error code for negative response” parameter in the NC side.

0x00030606 The negative response of “N_IL” was sent from the NC side.

Though the error is occurred in the NC side, the NC parameter “Error code

for negative response” is inactive.

Set up “Error code for negative response” in the NC side.

0x00030607 The NC program number is not specified, or the number is beyond the range.

Check that the NC program number is specified correctly.

0x00030609 The other DNC2 command is executing.

Try again after finishing it.

0x00030f02 The value except “0” is specified in the tool post number.

In case of DNC2, the value of 0 must be specified in the tool post number.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-217-

0x00030f03 The application program attempts to press the unsupported request to the

system.

Check the argument of the function.

0x00030f04 The invalid argument is specified in the function which requests the system to

read the NC data.

Check the argument of the function.

0x00030f05 The invalid argument is specified in the function which requests the system to

write the NC data.

Check the argument of the function.

0x00030f06 The value of 0 is specified in the “count” argument of the function which

requests the system to read the NC data.

The “count” value must be greater than or equal to “1”.

0x00030f09 The combination of arguments about the tool offset function is illegal.

The value of the arguments must adjust to either of the milling or the turning

type.

0x00030f0c The specified PMC address is illegal.

Check the PMC address and the PMC number argument.

0x00030f0d When the application program reads data from NC, the specified number of

data is too large.

Check the range of data supported by the NC.

Error Codes about Reader/Puncher of Communication Process

(0x00040000 ~ 0x0004ffff)

0x0004100a Though the NC requests the system to delete the file, the system can’t delete

the file.

Check that the specified file is existed, and it has the attribute of a deletion.

0x0004100f During the communication with the NC, the system received a bad character.

Allowable characters are: blank space, “.”, “-“,lower-case and upper case

alphabetics and numerics.

It is possible that the received character codes are broken in the cause of

wrong settings.

Check the RS-232-C parameters .

Check that the NC unit supports the Reader/Puncher protocol.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-218-

0x00041010 The system received the invalid command which is composed of 32 or more

characters from the NC.

Check that the NC supports the Reader/Puncher protocol.

0x00041018 While receiving the NC program, the system got a DC4 code before a ER

code.

It is possible that the NC is reset. If not, check the contents of the NC program

in the NC memory.

0x0004101c The error of TV check was occurred in the computer.

Check that the TV check parameter of the NC is active.

0x00041021 The file to be downloaded is not found.

Check that the specified file exists in the computer.

0x00041024 The system cannot distinguish an ISO code from an EIA code of the uploaded

NC program.

The system read a 100 characters from the top of the file, and automatically

distinguished ISO/EIA codes by searching for the LF character from among

these 1000 characters. However, the LF code was not found. (0x0a: ISO,

0x80: EIA)

Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.

0x00041025 There is not an NC program number in the contents of the uploaded NC

program. The NC program number must be included in the contents of an NC

program.

Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.

0x00041026 There are not the numerical characters continued from the “O” or “:”

character (which indicates an NC program number) in the contents of the

uploaded NC program.

Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.

0x00041028 While the system distinguishes an ISO code from an EIA code of the

uploaded program, the illegal character was found.

Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.

0x0004102c While downloading or uploading an NC program, the illegal character was

found.

Check the contents of the NC program in the NC side.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-219-

Communication Process Errors Relating to FA SYSTEM for PC DNC1/Ethernet

(0x00060000 ~ 0x0006ffff)

0x00060102 The specified machine number is illegal.

Check the machine number currently registered to the Machine Setup screen.

0x00060103 An invalid service was requested.

The F_Start, F_Reset and F_ReadTooLife functions cannot be executed by

DNC1/Ethernet.

0x00060106 Processing was aborted as the DNC1/Ethernet communication process

termination request was received during processing of the request.

0xxx60107 Another process is currently being executed on the NC having the specified

machine number.

Wait a while before retrying.

0x0006010c The range of the NC program number specified by the download and upload

request is illegal.

Make sure that the NC program number is within the range 1 to 9999.

0x0006011b “0” (zero) was specified for arguments (offset type, and number of reads and

writes) that require a value 1 or higher.

Specify a value higher than 1.

0x0006011c An illegal value was specified to the offset type during reading and writing of

tool offsets.

Make sure that the correct NC name is set to <Machine Type> on the

[Machine Information] tab in the Machine Setup menu, and check <Tool

Offset Type> on the [Communication Tab].

0x0006011e An illegal value was specified to the address type during reading and writing

of tool offsets.

Make sure that the correct NC name is set to <Machine Type> on the

[Machine Information] tab in the Machine Setup menu, and check <PMC

Address Specification Form> on the [Communication Tab].

0x0006011f A value larger than 32 was specified as the number of reads and writes during

reading and writing of PMC data.

Set a number up to 32.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-220-

0x00060121 An error occurred during reading and writing of NC parameters.

Make sure that the correct NC name is set to <Machine Type> on the

[Machine Information] tab in the Machine Setup menu, and check <Bit Type

Data Type> on the [Communication Tab].

0x00060123 Cannot connect to the NC by Ethernet.

Check the “DNC1/Ethernet” setting in “2.6.3 Setups Relating to Machine

Communication” and the Ethernet cable connection.

0x00060125 An M198 call was received during DNC operation.

M198 calls are not accepted. Make sure that the program name is not

specified in “Select DNC File” in the NC's “Communication OP” screen.

0x00060126 An non-existent axis was specified during reading or writing of NC

parameters.

Check the maximum number of axes usable on the NC and the details of the

axis specification.

0x00060128 Cannot connect to the C4 server.

Check the “DNC1/Ethernet” setting in “2.6.3 Setups Relating to Machine

Communication” and the Ethernet cable connection.

0x0006012a The survival signal from the NC is interrupted.

Probable causes are that the NC was turned OFF, or that the Ethernet cable is

not connected. So, processing cannot be executed. Check the NC power

supply and Ethernet cable.

0x0006012c Download or upload started by the host was canceled by the cancel function.

0x0006012d Though canceling of download or upload started by the host was requested by

the host, the requested service is not currently being executed.

Check the machine number to be canceled and the cancel details.

0x0006012e The NC program that is requested for downloading and DNC program does

not contain an O number.

Check the contents of the NC program.

0x0006012f The parameter number specified during reading and writing of parameters

does not exist.

Check the parameter number.

0x000604f0 The NC was turned OFF during Ethernet communications. Or, the Ethernet

cable was cut.

Check the NC power supply and Ethernet cable.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-221-

0x000604fe (1) A reset or emergency stop was executed on the NC during DNC operation by

start up from the computer.

Check the NC status and execute DNC operation again.

0x000604fe (2) A non-executable program was executed by DNC operation.

Check the program details.

0x000604ff (1) Programs cannot be deleted in the MDI mode.

Set to any mode other than the MDI mode.

0x000604ff (2) The currently selected program cannot be deleted in a mode other than the

EDT mode.

0x000604ff (3) A currently executing program cannot be selected.

0x00060503 (1) “0” was specified as the offset number during reading and writing of the tool

offset number. Or, a non-existent offset number on the NC was specified.

Check the offset number.

0x00060503 (2) A local variable or system variable, or non-existent macro number was

specified during writing to the custom macro variable.

Writing to local variables or system variables is not possible. Check the macro

number.

0x00060503 (3) A non-existent PMC data number was specified during reading and writing of

PMC data.

Check the PMC data Number.

0x00060503 (4) A value outside of the parameter range was specified during reading and

writing of NC parameters.

Check the write data.

0x00060504 (1) An illegal address was specified during reading and writing of PMC data.

Check the address.

0x00060504 (2) Writing to all areas of addresses F and X and writing to R9000 onwards was

specified.

Writing to these areas is not possible.

0x00060505 (1) When the 140 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC:

Downloading to the program currently selected on the NC is not possible.

0x00060505 (2) When the 73 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC:

Overwriting and downloading to an existing program is not possible. Check

NC parameter 3201#1.

0x00060505 (3) When the 72 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC:

The number of programs that can be registered to the NC has been exceeded.

Delete unwanted programs.

0x00060505 (4) Programs not existing in the NC cannot be uploaded.

0x00060505 (5) Programs not existing in the NC cannot be selected.

0x00060505 (6) Programs not existing in the NC cannot be deleted.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-222-

0x00060507 The NC program cannot be deleted as the memory protect key is ON.

Turn the memory protect key OFF.

0x00060508 When the 70 BP/S alarm occurred on the NC:

The “insufficient memory” error occurred on the NC during downloading.

Delete unwanted programs, and try downloading again.

0x0006050b The system number is wrongly specified.

Specify the correct system number.

0x0006050c Downloading in the MDI mode is not possible.

Change the mode to the EDT or MEM mode.

0x0006050d Though DNC operation started by the host was executed, the data transfer

request has not arrived from the NC.

Set the NC to the MEM mode, set the DNC1 signal to ON to set the NC to the

RMT mode, execute a cycle start and execute DNC operation started by the

host.

Other Errors Relating to FA SYSTEM for PC (0x10010000 ~ 0x1009ffff)

0x10010003 The computer ran out of memory during execution of FA SYSTEM for PC.

Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to

secure more memory.

0x10011009 The computer ran out of memory during initialization of FA SYSTEM for PC.

Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to

secure more memory.

0x10011102 The computer ran out of memory during initialization of FA SYSTEM for PC.

Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to

secure more memory.

0x10011103 The computer ran out of memory during initialization of FA SYSTEM for PC.

Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to

secure more memory.

0x10011106 Illegal machine number

Communication can be carried out only with machines that can be set in the

Machine Setup screen.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-223-

0x10011107 Illegal file number

Make sure that a number 1 or larger is set to the file number.

A file having a number smaller than the specified file is registered to the

default directory. Check the file number.

0x10011108 Illegal file name

0x10011130 The default directory is not set in the Machine Setup screen.

Set the default directory.

0x10011131 Though downloading of the top file was carried out by Reader/Puncher

communication, the top file is not set.

Set the top file in the Select Transfer File screen.

0x10011132 Failed to delete a file.

Make sure that the file is not write-protected, or that it is not opened

exclusively by another process.

0x10013001 Failed to get the port number from the services file.

Make sure that the FANUC_PCFA_CDA entry is registered to the services

file.

0x10013101 Failed to get the port number from the services file.

Make sure that the FANUC_PFCA_CDA entry is registered to the services

file.

0x1002010a The file to download does not exist.

Make sure that the file to download exists.

0x1002010b The file to download cannot be opened.

Check the attributes of the file to download.

0x1002010c The file to download does not contain an O number.

Make sure that the file contains an O number.

0x1002010e An error occurred during reading of the file to download.

0x10020111 An error occurred during closing of the file to download.

0x10020112 An error occurred during moving of the file to overwrite by upload.

Check the attributes of the file to overwrite by upload.

0x10020113 An error occurred during creation of the file to upload.

Make sure that the directory settings are correct.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-224-

0x10020115 An error occurred during writing of the file to upload.

0x10020118 An error occurred during closing of the file to upload.

Make sure that the network is normal when the network directory is used.

0x10022011 Data whose MSB (8th bit) is 1 has been found.

Make sure that the NC program you are attempting to transfer does not

contain any illegal characters (Kanji characters, half-size kana characters,

etc.).

0x10022022 The O number of the file to download is more than 5 digits.

Keep the number of O number digits to 4 or less.

0x10022023 The O number of the file to download is “0” (zero).

Set the O number to a value other than “0”.

0x10022035 The buffer overflowed in a flush stop state.

Keep the capacity from the NC program end code up to the EOF or next O

number to within several tens of bytes.

0x10022052 The subprogram call nesting level has exceeded 8.

Limit the subprogram call nesting level to 8.

0x10022053 Failed to open the subprogram file.

Check the access rights of the subprogram file.

Make sure that the subprogram file is not in use by other processes.

0x10022054 The corresponding file for the subprogram call does not exist.

Make sure that the subprogram file call exists.

0x10022055 The next O number was found in the subprogram file.

Multi-volume files are not supported in subprogram files.

0x10022056 The subprogram file does not contain an M99 code.

Subprogram files need an M99 code.

0x10022058 The O number in the file does not match the subprogram file name.

The O number in the file must be the same as the subprogram file name.

0x10022059 An M02 or M30 codes was found in the subprogram file.

The M02 or M30 codes cannot be used in subprogram files.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-225-

0x10022062 The M99 code was found in the main program for extended transfer of

subprogram files.

Main programs for extended transfer of subprogram files cannot contain an

M99 code.

0x10022091 Failed to open the transfer file.

Check the access rights of the transfer file.

Make sure that the transfer file is not in use by other processes.

0x10022092 The transfer file does not exist.

Make sure that the transfer file exists.

0x10022093 The transfer files in the separate transfer mode does not contain an O number.

The files specified in the list need an O number in the separate transfer mode.

(The O number in List Files is used only in extended transfer.)

0x100220a1 Line 1 of the NC program has exceeded 320 characters.

Limit lines including subprogram calls to 320 characters per line.

0x100220a2 The P code is “0” (zero).

Specify an O number (1 to 9999) valid for a P code.

0x100220a3 The P code is above 9999.

Specify an O number (1 to 9999) valid for a P code.

0x100220a4 Two P codes are set.

Do not specify two or more P codes in lines containing subprogram calls.

0x100220a5 Two L codes are set.

Do not specify two or more L codes in lines containing subprogram calls.

0x10022104 An attempt was made to re-transfer an O number that has already been

transfer.

Make sure that two or files having the same O number are not specified in the

list.

0x10022105 An MFC file exception occurred.

0x10022107 Failed to move the original file by overwrite upload.

Make sure that the original file is not in use by another process.

0x10022108 Failed to create the upload file.

Make sure that the directory in which the upload file is created exists.

Check the access rights of the directory in which the upload file is created.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-226-

0x1002210a Failed to write to the upload file.

0x1002210b Failed to close to the upload file.

0x1002210d An attempt was made to overwrite and upload a read-only file.

Make sure that the file has been correctly specified.

0x1003000b Failed to open the FA SYSTEM for PC setup data in the computer's registry.

Make sure that FA SYSTEM for PC is set up correctly.

Make sure that the Windows NT registry is not damaged.

0x1003000c Failed to read the FA SYSTEM for PC setup data in the computer's registry.

Make sure that FA SYSTEM for PC is set up correctly.

Make sure that the Windows NT registry is not damaged.

0x10040102 The value of the specified machine number is illegal.

0x10040105 The value of the specified descriptor is illegal.

Make sure that the value of the descriptor returned from FA LIBRARY is

used correctly, and that F_FreeID is not being executed on that descriptor.

0x10040106 The name of the specified computer is illegal.

0x1004010a The specified descriptor cannot be processed by this function.

The correspondence between the details indicated by the descriptor and the

function to be processed is in error such that the descriptor, that was handed

over when the tool offset was read, was handed over to the function for

copying the custom macro variable.

0x1004010b An attempt was made to copy the results data even though the data read

request failed.

0x1004010d The read start position specified by F_Seek() is a value larger than the number

of data items.

Make sure that the value of the read start position is within the range 0 to a

value smaller than the number of data items -1.

0x1004010f The file name and full path of the file is not set in a download or upload in

which the file name and full path of the file is specified.

0x10040110 The O number in an upload or download in which an O number is specified or

the O number specified by a selection or deletion is illegal.

Make sure that the O number is within the range 1 to 9999.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-227-

0x10040111 Cannot find the execution format file for the communication process.

0x10040114 A machining center tool offset type is specified together with a lathe tool

offset type during reading and writing of the tool offset.

0x10040118 (1) “0” (zero) was specified as the number of data items during reading and

writing.

Set within the range 1 to 32.

0x10040118 (2) The tool offset type was not specified during reading and writing of the tool

offset.

Specify the tool offset type.

0x10040119 No valid notification message

0x1004011c The CDA Manager is not functioning.

When CDA Manager cannot function properly, check that

FANUC_PCFA_CDA is set to the services file.

A line feed is needed at the end of each line of data registered to the services

file.

0x1004011d No machines are set in the Machine Setup screen.

0x1004020f The Communication Manager is not functioning.

A probable cause is that F_Open was executed without executing

F_CreateCommunication, or that F_Close was executed after

F_TerminateCommunication was executed.

0x10040210 FANUC_PCFA_APP is not specified in the service file.

0x10060001 An attempt was made to open an already opened List File.

Close the file and try opening it again.

0x10060002 Failed to open the List File.

When an attempt is being made to manipulate the List File by machine, make

sure that the transfer is being carried out, and that the machine number is

correct.

When an attempt is being made to manipulate an existing original List File,

make sure that another process is not manipulating the same file, and that the

specified file name is correct.

When an attempt is being made to manipulate a new original List File, make

sure that the specified file is correct.

0x10060003 The specified List File does not exist.

Make sure that the specified List File does not contain any errors.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-228-

0x10060004 Failed to close the List file.

0x10060005 The specified List File is already opened.

0x10060006 The application attempted to execute the function for auxiliary transfer

functions.

Make sure that the transfer function is correct.

0x1006000a The record flag of the specified record is incorrect.

The function that you attempted to manipulate is in a non-executable flag state.

Check the record flag.

0x1006000b Failed to exclusively process (lock) the header.

0x1006000c Failed to exclusively process (lock) the specified record section.

0x1006000d The function for the original List File was executed on List Files by machine.

0x1006000f The function for the List Files by machine was executed on the original List

File.

0x10060010 Failed to seek the specified record.

0x10060011 Failed to read from the List File.

0x10060012 Could not read the data of anticipated size from the List File.

Check the contents of the List File.

0x10060013 Failed to write to the List File.

0x10060014 Failed to write to the data of size to which an attempt was made to write to the

List File.

Check the contents of the List File.

0x10060015 The O number flag of the specified record is incorrect.

Check the specified O flag again.

0x10060016 Failed to exclusively process (unlock) the header.

0x10060017 Failed to exclusively process (unlock) the specified record section.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-229-

0x10060018 Failed to open the registry.

Make sure that the registry is correctly set.

The directory (HELPER_MACHINE_LIST_DIR) in which the List File is

created for each machine is not set to the registry.

Correctly set the registry.

0x10060019 Failed to read the key from the registry.

Make sure that the registry is correctly set.

0x1006001a Failed to read the value from the registry.

Make sure that the registry is correctly set.

0x1006001b The header flag of the List File by machine does not indicate “Transferring.”

Make sure that the header flag indicates “Transferring.”

0x1006001c An attempt was made to correct an already transferred record.

0x1006001d The record having the record number specified in the List File does not exist.

Check the number of records.

0x1009F001 The computer ran out of memory during execution of FA SYSTEM for PC.

Either terminate unwanted applications, or increase the virtual memory to

secure more memory.

0x1009F004 The machine to communicate with by DNC1/Ethernet is not correctly

connected to the network.

Check the Ethernet cable connection and network setup.

Also make sure that the value of FANUC_C4_SERVER in the services files

matches the value of “UDP port No.” in the “ETHPRM” parameter on the

NC.

0x1009F005 Cannot connect to the FANUC C4 Server.

Make sure that the FANUC C4 Server has started correctly by [Control Panel]

- [Service]. Also, make sure that “127.0.0.1” is set as the [C4 Server Host

Name] in the Machine Setup screen.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-230-

Error Codes returned from the NC (0x20010000 ~ 0x2002ffff)

0x2001fffe The DNC1 service failed in the DNC1 board on the computer.

0x2001fffd The DNC1 connection is closed in the DNC1 board on the computer.

0x2001fffc The error was occurred in the DNC1 board on the computer.

0x2001fffb The illegal packet was received in the DNC1 board on the computer.

0x2001fffa The undefined command was received in the DNC1 board on the computer.

0x2001fff9 The timeout error was occurred in the DNC1 board on the computer.

0x2001fff8 The illegal reply was received in the DNC1 board on the computer.

0x2001fff7 The syntax error of DNC1 message was found in the DNC1 board on the

computer.

0x2001ffba Command syntax error

0x2002ffba

0x2001ffb9 Command exchange sequence error

0x2002ffb9

0x2001ffce Negative program number

0x2002ffce

0x2001ffcd Program number format error

0x2002ffcd

0x2001ffcc Specified axis has not been mounted.

0x2002ffcc

0x2001ffcb Too many data items were requested.

0x2002ffcb

0x2001ffca No data item can be read.

0x2002ffca If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read the tool

offset data, the offset number is illegal.

If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read the

custom macro variable, the macro variable number is illegal.

If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read the tool

life data, the tool offset number is illegal.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-231-

0x2001ffc9 Invalid axis command

0x2002ffc9

0x2001ffc6 The request is executing.

0x2002ffc6

0x2001ffc5 The request is canceling.

0x2002ffc5

0x2001ff00 The NC executes the cancel command.

0x2002ff00

0x2001fdff Timeout

0x2002fdff

0x2001fdfe Channel is busy

0x2002fdfe

0x2001fdfd Data remaining

0x2002fdfd

0x2001fdfc Incorrect file name

0x2002fdfc

0x2001fdfb Open request rejected

0x2002fdfb If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to

download/upload an NC program in the FS0 unit, the NC falls into the alarm

status.

0x2001fdfa Edit request rejected

0x2002fdfa

0x2001fdf9 NC busy

0x2002fdf9

0x2001fc0c A specified file was not found.

0x2002fc0c If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to select an NC

program, the NC program is not found.

0x2001fc0b A warning was occurred during selection of a file

0x2002fc0b

0x2001fc0a Start request rejected

0x2002fc0a If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to start an NC,

the NC is already executing a program.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-232-

0x2001fc09 Not in auto mode

0x2002fc09 If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to start an NC,

the NC is not in the auto mode.

If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to select an NC

program, an NC is not the incorrect mode.

0x2001fc08 File selection request rejected

0x2002fc08 An NC program is being edited or executed in the NC. In case of FS0, the NC

falls in the alarm.

0x2001fc07 File deletion request rejected

0x2002fc07

0x2001fc06 File protected

0x2002fc06

0x2001fc05 File deletion request rejected, or warning occurred during

0x2002fc05 file deletion.

0x2001fc04 editing request rejected

0x2002fc04

0x2001fc03 Directory not found

0x2002fc03

0x2001fc02 Directory read request rejected

0x2002fc02

0x2001fc01 Invalid directory or file name

0x2002fc01

0x2001fba8 Window library error

0x2002fba8

0x2002fba7 Command not executable

0x2001fba7 If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to delete an NC

program in FS16/18, the specified NC program is being edited.

0x2002fba6 Invalid function code

0x2001fba6

0x2001fba5 Invalid big data classification

0x2002fba5 If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read/write

the NC data, the data address is illegal.

0x2001fba4 Invalid medium data classification

0x2002fba4

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX C. ERROR CODE

-233-

0x2001fba3 Invalid small data classification

0x2002fba3 If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to read/write

the NC data, the NC data address is illegal.

0x2001fba2 Invalid data length

0x2002fba2

0x2001fba1 Invalid data type

0x2002fba1

0x2001fba0 Invalid data

0x2002fba0

0x2001fb9f Miscellaneous command errors

0x2002fb9f

0x2001fb9e No option

0x2002fb9e If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to write the

custom macro variable, the NC doesn’t support the specified custom macro

variable number.

If the error is occurred when the application program attempts to write the

tool offset data, the NC doesn’t support the specified tool offset number.

0x2001fb9d File not found

0x2002fb9d If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to delete an NC

program, the specified NC program doesn’t exist in the NC memory.

0x2001fb9c File protected

0x2002fb9c

0x2001fb9b No directory space

0x2002fb9b

0x2001fb9a Insufficient memory space

0x2002fb9a

0x2001fb99 Read disable

0x2002fb99

0x2001fb98 Write disable

0x2002fb98 If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to delete an NC

program, the specified NC program is protected.

C. ERROR CODE APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-234-

0x2001fb97 Write failed

0x2002fb97

0x2001fb96 Read failed

0x2002fb96

0x2001fb95 Device inoperable

0x2002fb95

0x2001fb94 System not ready

0x2002fb94

0x2001fb93 Invalid status

0x2002fb93 If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to delete an NC

program, the specified NC program is being edited.

0x2001fb92 Data mismatch

0x2002fb92

0x2001fb46 No extended window option

0x2002fb46

0x2001fb45 Miscellaneous errors

0x2002fb45

0x2001f62d Write protected

0x2002f62d If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to download an

NC program, the NC program numbers of the 8000s and 9000s are protected.

0x2001f625 Data not found

0x2002f625 If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to upload an NC

program, the specified NC program doesn’t exist in the NC memory.

0x2001f61f Program already exists.

0x2002f61f If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to download an

NC program, the NC prohibits the system from writing over an NC program.

0x2001f61e Insufficient program space

0x2002f61e If the error is occurred when an application program attempts to download an

NC program, there is no free space left on the NC memory .

0x2001f61b Too many programs

0x2002f61b

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-235-

D DNC1

DNC1 is a private network developed by FANUC. FA SYSTEM for PC is

compatible with “Mode1” of DNC1 protocol. Mode1 enables multi-point

communication where a computer acts as the primary station and controls

multiple NCs.

FA SYSTEM for PC allows connection of up to 16 NCs on a single computer.

Connection Example

Example of Connection of 3 NCs to a Computer by Optical Adapter B

DNC1 board

(for NC)DNC1 board

NC

Optical fiber cable

COP1

Computer

Opticaladapter B

Teminatorunit

Tap

Metal cable

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-236-

Example of Connection of 3 NCs to a Computer by Optical Adapter C

For details on how to connect the optical adapter, refer to the “DNC1 Optical

Tap Hardware Specifications” at the end of this manual.

Optical

adapter C

DNC1 board

(for NC)

DNC1 board

NC

Optical fiber cable

COP1

Computer

Metal cable

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-237-

D.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR DNC1 BOARD

1 The DNC1 board conforms to the ISA(Industrial Standard Architecture),

and it can be used in the PC/AT compatible machine.

But both of the DNC1 board and the XT extend board can’t be used in

one computer.

� “XT” means the eight-bit architecture used in the IBM PC/XT.

� The ISA bus (AT bus) means the sixteen-bit architecture used in the

IBM PC/AT.

� The edge of a board distinguishes the XT extend board from the

ISA extend board. Refer to the following figure.

� A certain ISA extend board adopts the eight-bit architecture.

Carefully read the manual of the boards in your computer, and

check that they don’t adopt the eight-bit architecture.

Extend Board for XT Bus Extend Board for ISA Bus

2 The following resources �I/O Port Address, Memory Address, IRQ) are

used in the DNC1 board.

3 I/O Port Address can be selected from the list below.

� 100h~10Fh, � 110h~11Fh, � 120h~12Fh, � 130h~13Fh, � 140h~14Fh,

� 150h~15Fh, � 160h~16Fh, � 170h~17Fh, � 220h~22Fh, � 230h~23Fh,

� 280h~28Fh, � 290h~29Fh, � 300h~30Fh, � 310h~31Fh, � 320h~32Fh,

� 330h~33Fh

The default I/O Port Address is � 280~28Fh.

WARNING

If the DNC1 board is used together with the XT extend board or the

eight-bit architecture ISA board, it can not work correctly.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-238-

4 Memory Address can be selected from the list below.

� C0000h~C7FFFh, � C8000h~CFFFFh, � D0000h~D7FFFh,

� D8000h~DFFFFh, � E0000h~E7FFFh, � E8000h~EFFFFh

5 IRQ can be selected from the list below.

� 3, � 5, � 7, � 9, � 10, � 11, � 15

6 The DNC1 board spends the power supply like this.

+5V, 1.4A(maximum)

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-239-

D.2 CONDITIONS FOR USING THE DNC1 DRIVER

The WinRT software is used in the DNC1 driver.

If WinRT is also used in other software packages of your computer, the

DNC1 driver can not be installed.

�� WinRT is the trademark of Blue Water Systems Co.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-240-

D.3 SETTING UP THE DNC1 BOARD

1 Select the I/O Port Address by setting the SW1 switch on the DNC1

board before plugging the board into an ISA slot of the computer.

The DNC1 board must have a unique I/O Port Address, and it is not

allowed that the I/O Port Address is duplicated with the addresses of

other boards.

The location of SW1 switch

8

4

C

0

Relationship between the SW1 switch and the I/O Port Address

SW1 I/O Port Address SW1 I/O Port Address

0�default� 280h ~ 28Fh 8 100h ~ 10Fh

1 290h ~ 29Fh 9 110h ~ 11Fh

2 220h ~ 22Fh A 120h ~ 12Fh

3 230h ~ 23Fh B 130h ~ 13Fh

4 300h ~ 30Fh C 140h ~ 14Fh

5 310h ~ 31Fh D 150h ~ 15Fh

6 320h ~ 32Fh E 160h ~ 16Fh

7 330h ~ 33Fh F 170h ~ 17Fh

2 Remove the slot plate from the computer.

3 Carefully plug the DNC1 board into the ISA slot.

4 Screw the endplate of DNC1 board to the computer chassis.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-241-

D.4 SETTING UP DNC1 DRIVER

Please install the DNC1 driver (A08B-9510-J560#ZZ07) with the following

procedure.

1 Insert the “DNC1 Driver Disk Setup” disk into the floppy drive on your

computer.

2 From the Program Manager of WindowsNT, start the “SETUP.EXE”

program stored in the floppy.

3 The setup screen will appear.

Modify the directory where you install the DNC1 driver if necessary.

And click the <Continue> button.

4 The following disk information screen will appear.

Confirm that the disk space of [Space Available] is larger than that of

[Space Required], and click the <Setup> button.

If [Space Available] is not enough, click the <Cancel> button, and then

stop the installation. Try to install into the other disk with enough space.

5 When the <Setup> button is clicked, the installation is progressing

automatically.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-242-

6 When the message “Setup was succeeded” is displayed and the following

[DNC1 Tools] group dialog is created, the installation is complete.

Entry of DNC1 Driver ( Add or Change)

When the DNC1 driver is only installed, it is not enough to run the DNC1

driver in WindowsNT. Please register the DNC1 driver into WindowsNT as

follows.

1 Double-click the [DNC1 SetUp] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-243-

2 Choose the�DNC1 Board No.1�panel.

3 Set up the same I/O Port Address as the SW1 switch on DNC1 board.

And set the Memory Address and the IRQ, avoiding the duplication of

other boards.

4 Click the <OK> button.

5 When the message “DNC1 driver was started” is displayed, the DNC1

board entry to WindowsNT is complete.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-244-

Removing the DNC1Driver (Remove)

Please remove the DNC1 driver from WindowsNT like this.

1 Double-click the [DNC1 SetUp] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group.

2 Click the <Remove> option button, and then click the <OK> button.

3 When the message “DNC1 driver was removed” is displayed, the

deletion of the DNC1 driver from WindowsNT is complete.

Confirming the DNC1 driver settings

Please confirm the DNC1 driver settings as follows.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-245-

1 Double-click the [DNC1 SetUp] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group

dialog.

2 Choose the [DNC1 Board No.1] panel.

3 Check the contents of [Current Settings]. If “None” is displayed in

[Current Settings], the DNC1 driver is not registered into WindowsNT

yet.

4 Click the <Cancel> button.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-246-

D.5 Dnc1HardTest

By using the Dnc1HardTest program, you can check whether the DNC1 board

works correctly and DNC1 driver is registered into WindowsNT or not.

When the DNC1 board is used at the beginning, you must execute the

Dnc1HardTest program to confirm that the DNC1 board works correctly and

DNC1 driver is registered into WindowsNT.

The loop-back test connector must be connected to the DNC1 optical adapter

unit when the Dnc1HardTest program is executed.

The Dnc1HardTest program sets the DNC1 baud rate to “460Kbaud”. So, the

optical adapter unit must be set to the same baud rate. For more information

about the way for setting the optical adapter, refer to “DNC1 OPTICAL TAP

SPECIFICATION A-71430E”.

� Sample connection of Loop-Back connector

LoopBack Contecter

(A13B-0156-C201)

Terminate Unit

(A13B-0156-C200)

Optical Adapter B(A13B-0156-

C300)

Optical Cable(A66L-6001-0009#L20R03)DNC1Board(A20B-8100-0070)

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-247-

Starting Dnc1HardTest

1 Double-click the [Dnc1HardTest] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group

dialog.

2 The following main screen of the Dnc1Hard Test program will appear.

Finishing Dnc1HardTest

1 Click the [Exit] command of the [SetUp] menu in the Dnc1HardTest

program.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-248-

Initial Settings of Dnc1HardTest

The initial settings must be executed before “Memory Test” and “Interrupt

Test”.

“Diagnostic Test” doesn’t need the initial settings.

Using Dnc1HardTest

1 Click the [Initialize...] command in the [SetUp] menu.

2 If the above message box “Dnc1HardTest finished to initialize” is not

displayed, the Dnc1HardTest initialization is failed.

The cause of failure is that the DNC1 driver is not registered into

WindowsNT.

Confirm that DNC1 driver is registered into WindowsNT.

For more information about the way for the confirmation, refer to

“Confirming the DNC1 driver settings” of “D.4 Setting up DNC1

Driver”.

Diagnostic Test

Using Dnc1HardTest

1 Click the <Diagnostic Test> button in the Dnc1Hard Test main screen.

2 Click the <RUN> button.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-249-

3 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the test is successful.

Otherwise, the test is failed.

4 In case of failure, check the green LEDs on DNC1 board while the test

program is running.

For details, refer to “(5) LED state when the diagnosis is running” and

“(6) LED state when an error is occurred during diagnosis” in “D.8

Maintenance Information of DNC1 Board”.

Error codes for [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test

2: The DNC1 driver is not registered correctly into WindowsNT.

FFFFFDF1: The IRQ is illegal.

FFFFFDF2: The Memory Address is illegal.

FFFFFDF3: The Other error is occurred.

Error codes for [Contents] of Diagnostic Test

FF10: The DMAC of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FF20: The EPROM of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FF30: The IRC of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FF40: The MPSC of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FF50: The register of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FF60: The SRAM of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FF70: The timer of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FF80: The internal loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed.

FF81: The internal loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed.

FF90: The external loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed.

FF91: The external loop back test of the DNC1 board is failed.

FFB0: The IRC of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

FFC0: The LED of the DNC1 board doesn’t work correctly.

Troubleshooting of Diagnostic Test

� If the value of 2 is displayed in [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test, try to

register the DNC1 driver into WindowsNT again.

� If “FFFFFDF2” is displayed in [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test, make

sure that the Memory Address doesn’t match the address on other boards.

Try reconfiguring the DNC1 driver for a different Memory Address .

� If “FFFFFDF3” is displayed in [RESULT] of Diagnostic Test, make sure

that the IRQ setting doesn’t match the IRQ on other boards.

Try reconfiguring the DNC1 driver for a different IRQ.

� If “FF90” or “FF91” is displayed in [CONTENTS] of Diagnostic Test,

make sure that the loop-back connector is connected to the optical

adapter.

Make sure that the optical adapter is switched on.

� If you have an error code except for the above, there may be something

wrong with the hardware of your DNC1 board.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-250-

Memory Test

Using Dnc1HardTest

1 Click the <Memory Test> button in the Dnc1HardTest main screen.

2 Click the <RUN> button.

3 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the test is successful.

Otherwise, the test is failed.

In case of failure, there may be something wrong with the hardware of

your DNC1 board.

Interrupt Test

Using Dnc1HardTest

1 Click the <Interrupt Test> button in the Dnc1HardTest main screen.

2 Click the <RUN> button.

3 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the test is successful.

Otherwise, the test is failed.

In case of failure, there may be something wrong with your DNC1 board.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-251-

D.6 Dnc1Test

The “Dnc1Test” is the software that enables to test the DNC1 communication

services.

When the DNC1 network is laid newly, or it is re-constructed, you must check

that the DNC1 communication is working correctly.

Starting Dnc1Test

1 Double-click the [Dnc1Test] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group dialog.

2 The following main screen of the “Dnc1Test” appears.

Finishing Dnc1Test

1 Click the [Exit] of the [SetUp] menu in the main screen.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-252-

Initializing Dnc1Test

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the [Initialize...] of the [SetUp] menu in the main screen.

2 The [SetUp DNC1] dialog appears like this.

3 Choose the baud rate. It must correspond with the SW1 switch of the

DNC1 optical adapter. For more information about the DNC1 optical

adapter, refer to “DNC1 OPTICAL TAP SPECIFICATION” and

“FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B-61782E”.

4 Click the <Run> button.

5 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the setup is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-253-

Establishing DNC1 Connection

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Establish DNC1 Connect> button in the main screen.

2 From the combo box, select the DNC1 station address of the NC.

3 Click the <Run> button.

4 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the establishment is

successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

Confirm the Status of DNC1 Connection

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <State of DNC1 Connect> button in the main screen.

The check “����” is displayed when the corresponding machine is connected to

the computer.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-254-

Downloading NC Program Requested by Computer

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Download by PC> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Enter the NC program number you want to download.

For example, if you want to download the NC program number “O0017”,

enter “0017” or “17”.

5 Enter the file to be downloaded.

Enter the file name “C:�NCDATA�O0017.PRG”, for example.

6 Click the <Run> button.

7 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the download is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-255-

Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Upload by PC> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Enter the NC program number you want to upload.

For example, if you want to upload the NC program number “O0017”,

enter “0017” or “17”.

5 Enter the file name for storing the uploaded NC program. Enter the file

name “C: NCDATA O0017.PRG”, for example.

6 Click the <Run> button.

7 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the upload is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-256-

Downloading NC Program Requested by NC

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Download by NC> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Enter the NC program number you want to download.

5 Enter the file name for storing the uploaded NC program. Enter the file

name “C: NCDATA O0017.PRG”, for example.

Check that NC program number specified by NC side is described in the

file you want to call with the DNC operation.

6 Click the <Run> button.

Operating NC

7 Refer to “Procedure for Downloading an NC Program” of “Sample

Operations for FS16/18/15/0” in “B.1 DNC1, DNC2”.

Using Dnc1Test

8 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the download is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-257-

Uploading NC Program Requested by NC

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Upload by NC> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the

NC.

3 If the selected NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Enter the file name for storing the uploaded NC program.

Enter the file name “C: NCDATA O0017.PRG”, for example.

Check that NC program number specified by NC side is described in the

file you want to call with the DNC operation.

5 Click the <Run> button.

Operating NC

6 Refer to “Procedure for Uploading an NC Program” of “Sample

Operations for FS16/18/15/0” in “B.1 DNC1, DNC2”.

Using Dnc1Test

7 If the value of 0 is displayed in [ RESULT], the upload is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-258-

DNC Operation Requested by Computer

Operating NC

1 Change the NC mode to “TAPE”.

Using Dnc1Test

2 Click the <DNC Operation by PC> button in the main screen.

3 The DNC1 operation will be executed directly without checking the

PMC ladder. If the NC unit is ready for the DNC operation, click the

<Yes> button.

4 From the [Station Address], choose the station address of the NC.

5 If the selected NC is not any of FS15-MA/TA, and FS15-MB/TB, the

DNC operation can’t be executed by using the “Dnc1Test”. In this case,

click the <Close> button.

6 Enter ‘0’ for the tool post number. If the DNC operation can be

executed, the tool post number can’t be specified.

7 Enter the NC program number you want to call with the DNC operation.

For example, if you want to call the NC program number “O0017”, enter

“0017” or “17”.

8 Enter the name of the file to be transferred.

Enter the file name “C: NCDATA O0017.PRG”, for example.

9 Click the <Run> button.

10 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the DNC operation is

successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-259-

DNC Operation Requested by NC

Operating NC

1 Refer to item 1 to 9 of “Procedure for DNC Operation” of “Sample

Operations for FS16/18”, or item 1 to 6 of “Procedure for DNC

Operation” of “Sample Operations for FS15”, or item 1 to 6 of

“Procedure for DNC Operation” of “Sample Operations for FS0” in “B.1

DNC1, DNC2”.

Using Dnc1Test

2 Click the <DNC Operation by NC> button in the main screen.

3 From the [Station Address], select the station address of the NC.

4 Enter ‘0’ for the tool post number. If the DNC operation can be

executed, the tool post number can’t be specified.

5 Enter the file to be transferred.

Enter the file name “C: NCDATA O0017.PRG”, for example.

6 Click the <Run> button.

Operating NC

7 Refer to item 10 to 12 of “Procedure for DNC Operation” of “Sample

Operations for FS16/18”, or item 7 of “Procedure for DNC Operation”

of “Sample Operations for FS15”, or item 7 to 9 of “Procedure for DNC

Operation” of “Sample Operations for FS0” in “B.1 DNC1, DNC2”.

Using Dnc1Test

8 The value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT] if the DNC operation is

successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-260-

Selecting NC Program

Operating NC

1 Change the NC mode to “MEMORY”.

Using Dnc1Test

2 Click the <Select> button in the main screen.

3 From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the

NC.

4 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

5 Enter the NC program number you want to select.

For example, if you want to select the NC program number “O0017”,

enter “0017” or “17”.

6 Click the <Run> button.

7 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the selection is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed.

Deleting NC Program

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Delete> button in the main screen.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-261-

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, choose the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Enter the NC program number you want to delete.

For example, if you want to delete the NC program number “O0017”,

enter “0017” or “17”.

5 Click the <Run> button.

6 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the deletion is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed.

External Reset

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <External Reset> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, click the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Click the <Run> button.

5 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reset is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed.

Cycle Start

Operating NC

1 Change the NC mode to “MEMORY”.

Using Dnc1Test

2 Click the <Cycle Start> button in the main screen.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-262-

3 The cycle start operation will be executed directly without checking the

PMC ladder. If the NC unit is ready for the cycle start, click the <Yes>

button.

4 From the [Station Address] combo box, click the station address of the

NC.

5 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

6 Click the <Run> button.

7 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the start is successful.

Otherwise, it is failed.

List of NC Programs

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Directory> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, click the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Enter the name of file which the list is saved in.

Enter the file name “C: NCDATA NC01.DIR”, for example.

5 Click the <Run> button.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-263-

6 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the list is

successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

7 On successful, the list of NC programs was written in the file. The

following is the contents of the file.

Reading NC Program Information

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <NC Program> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of

the NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 Enter the NC program number of information you want to read.

For example, if you want to read the information of the NC program

number “O0017”, enter “0017” or “17”.

5 Click the <Run> button.

6 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the

information is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-264-

Reading Variable Data

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Read Variable> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 To read the variable data, enter the parameters in [Function Code], [Big

Class], [Middle Class], [Small Class], [Data Type], [Data Length], and

[Data Amount].

If you want to express the parameter in hexadecimal, the parameter value

must be preceded “&H”. For example, the hexadecimal value of 33 must

be specified by “&H33”.

5 For more information about the function code, the big class, the middle

class, the small class, the data type, the data length, and the data, refer to

“Appendix 1 DNC1 DATA Function Details” of “FANUC SYSTEM F-

MODEL D Mate PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-75013E-2 (from here

on referred to as “Programming manual”).

6 Click the <Run> button.

7 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the variable

data is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-265-

Writing Variable Data

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Write Variable> button in the main screen.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of the

NC.

3 If the specified NC unit is the multi-path system, enter the tool post

number. If not so, you don’t need to enter it.

4 To write the variable data, enter the parameters in [Function Code], [Big

Class], [Middle Class], [Small] Class], [Data Type], [Data Length], and

[Data Amount].

If you want to express the parameter value in hexadecimal, the parameter

value must be preceded “&H”. For example, the hexadecimal value of 33

must be specified by “&H33”.

5 For more information about the function code, the big class, the middle

class, the small class, the data type, the data length, and the data amount,

refer to “Appendix 1 DNC1 DATA Function Details” of the

Programming manual.

6 If you want to write more than one variable data, separate each value by

a space character.

For example, if you want to write the PMC data values of “7”, “17” and

“23”, the character string “7 17 23” must be specified in the [Data] text

box.

7 Click the <Run> button.

8 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the writing of the variable

data is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-266-

Reading NC Identification

Using Dnc1Test

1 Click the <Identify> button in the main menu.

2 From the [Station Address] combo box, select the station address of the

NC.

3 Click the <Run> button.

4 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the reading of the NC

identification is successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

Notice of Alarm

Operating NC

1 Set up the NC parameters which enable to notify the NC alarm to a

computer.

For more information, refer to the Clause “7.2.6 FANUC SYSTEM F-

MODEL D Mate CONNECTION /MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-

75013E (from here on referred to as “Connection/maintenance manual”).

Using Dnc1Test

2 Click the <Notice of Alarm> button in the main screen.

3 Click the <Run> button.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-267-

Operating NC

4 Force the NC to raise an alarm.

Using Dnc1Test

5 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the notice of alarm is

successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

Notice of Status

Operating NC

1 Set up the NC parameters which enable to notify the NC status to a

computer.

For more information, refer to the Clause 7.2.6 of the

Connection/maintenance manual.

Using Dnc1Test

2 Click the <Notice of Status> button in the main screen.

3 Click the <Run> button.

Operating NC

4 Force the NC to change a status.

Using Dnc1Test

5 If the value of 0 is displayed in [RESULT], the notice of status is

successful. Otherwise, it is failed.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-268-

D.7 Dnc1LogViewer

The Dnc1LogViewer is the software for displaying the status of the DNC1

board and the DNC1 communication.

You don’t need to use the Dnc1LogViewer in usual operation.

If an error is occurred in the DNC1 board, you can check the status of the

DNC1 board and the contents of the DNC1 communication by using the

Dnc1LogViewer program.

You can also check the status by seeing the green LEDs on the DNC1 board.

Refer to “D.8 Maintenance information of DNC1 board” for more

information.

Starting Dnc1LogViewer

1 Double-click the [Dnc1LogViewer] program in the [DNC1 Tools] group

dialog.

2 The following Dnc1LogViewer screen will appear.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-269-

Finishing Dnc1LogViewer

1 Click the [Exit] command in the main screen.

Initializing Dnc1LogViewer

1 Click the [SetUp] command in the main menu.

2 If the massage “Dnc1LogViewer finished to initialize” is displayed, the

initialization is successful. Otherwise, it is failed. In such case, it is

possible that the DNC1 driver is not running. Confirm that the DNC1

driver is running correctly.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-270-

Showing DNC1 Log

The DNC1 Log shows the status of the DNC1 communication.

1 Click the [Get Dnc1Log] command of the [File] menu in the main screen.

2 The following GetDnc1Log screen will appear.

3 Enter the name of file for saving the DNC1 log.

Enter the file name “C: NCDATA TMP1.LOG”, for example.

4 Click the <Run> button. The contents of DNC1 log is shown like this.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-271-

Showing DNC1 Dump

The DNC1 Dump shows the status of the DNC1 board.

1 Click the [Get Dnc1Dump] command of the [File] menu in the main

screen.

2 The following Get Dnc1Dump screen will appear.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-272-

3 Enter the name of file for saving the contents of the DNC1 dump.

Enter the file name “C: NCDATA TMP1.DMP”, for example.

4 Click the <Run> button. The contents of DNC1 dump is shown like this.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-273-

D.8 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION OF DNC1BOARD

By seeing The LEDs on the DNC1 board, you can know the status of the

DNC1 board.

(0) LED Indicators

� :OFF, � :ON , � :Blinking, :Don’t care

(1) Power-up state (Green LEDs)

No. Software LEDs �� �� � � ��

�� �� � � ��

Status of DNC1 board

1 ��

��

Just at the power on

2 ��

��

Initializing DNC1 Board

3 ��

��

Initialization of DNC1 board was completed

(2) LED state when an application program is running�Green LEDs

No. Software LEDs �� �� � � ��

�� �� � � ��

Status of DNC1 board

1 ��

��

There is no connecting NC unit.

2 ��

��

There is more than one connecting NC unit.

3 ��

��

Running in normal

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-274-

(3) LED state when an error is occurred (Green LEDs)

No. Software LEDs �� �� � � ��

�� �� � � ��

Status of DNC1 board

1 ��

��

On initializing, the SRAM test is failed. (The

RAM on the DNC1 board is possible to be

damaged.)

2 ��

��

An illegal interrupt is occurred.

3 ��

��

An error is occurred in DNC1 board.

To know the cause of failure, see the DNC1

log and the DNC1 dump by using the

Dnc1LogViewer screen.

Refer to “D.7 Dnc1LogViewer” for details.

(4) LED state when an error is occurred (Red LED)

No. Hardware LED �� �� Status of DNC1 board

1 � A parity error is occurred.

(The RAM on DNC1 board is bad.)

(5) LED state when the diagnosis is running�Green LEDs

No. Software LEDs �� �� � � ��

�� �� � � ��

Status of DNC1 board

1 ��

��

Just starting diagnosis

2 ��

��

LED � test

3 ��

��

LED � test

4 ��

��

LED � test

5 ��

��

LED � test

6 ��

��

(Running diagnosis )

7 ��

��

Diagnosis is complete

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-275-

(6) LED state when an error is occurred during diagnosis (Green LEDs)

No. Software LEDs �� �� � � ��

�� �� � � ��

Status of DNC1 board

1 ��

��

The register is failed.

2 ��

��

The IRC test is failed.

3 ��

��

The MPC test is failed.

4 ��

��

The DMA test is failed.

5 ��

��

The EPROM test is failed.

6 ��

��

The timer test is failed.

7 ��

��

The SRAM test is failed.

8 ��

��

The Channel-A internal loop-back test is

failed.

9 ��

��

The Channel-A external loop-back test is

failed.

10 ��

��

The Channel-B internal loop-back test is

failed.

11 ��

��

The software interrupt test is failed.

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-276-

D.9 DNC1 BOARD, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE AND

OPTICAL CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS

Name Figure No. Remarks

DNC1 interface board A20B-8100-0070

DNC1 loopback connector A13B-0156-C201

DNC1 tap A13B-0156-C100 Electrical interfaces � 3

DNC1 optical adapter B A13B-0156-C300 Electrical interfaces � 3

Optical interface � 1

DNC1 optical adapter C A13B-0156-C301 Electrical interfaces � 1

Optical interface � 2

DNC1 terminator A13B-0156-C200

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L2R03 Cable lead length = 2m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L3R03 Cable lead length = 3m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L4R03 Cable lead length = 4m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L5R03 Cable lead length = 5m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L10R03 Cable lead length = 10m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L15R03 Cable lead length = 15m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L20R03 Cable lead length = 20m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L30R03 Cable lead length = 30m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L40R03 Cable lead length = 40m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L50R03 Cable lead length = 50m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L60R03 Cable lead length = 60m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L70R03 Cable lead length = 70m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L80R03 Cable lead length = 80m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L90R03 Cable lead length = 90m

External optical fiber cable A66L-6001-0009#L100R03 Cable lead length = 100m

NOTE

Optical fiber cable cannot be cut or connected by the machine tool

manufacturer. Be sure to use only the above pre-cut and pre-

connected cables.

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-277-

D.10 PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING RELATED PARTS

DNC1 Interface Board

(A) Static electricity countermeasures

The DNC1 interface board is supplied in a static-proof bag. Be sure to insert

the board in this bag when storing or carrying it. Before you remove the board

from the bag, be sure to discharge any static electricity from your body by

touching a metal object.

(B) Protection of card edge terminals

When you handle the DNC1 interface board, never touch the card edge

terminals (metal-coated contact with the connector). If you touch the terminals

by mistake, wipe lightly with clean tissue paper or cotton wool (may be

moistened with ethyl alcohol). Never use organic solvents other than ethyl

alcohol.

Optical Connector, Optical Fiber Cable

(A) Protection when not used

When the optical connectors and optical fiber cables are not used, cover their

connecting surfaces with the cover or caps provided. If the connectors and

cables are left exposed, dirt adhering to them may cause faulty contacts.

If they become dirty, wipe lightly with clean tissue paper or cotton wool (may

be moistened with ethyl alcohol). Never use organic solvents other than ethyl

alcohol.

Protecting the Optical Connector and Optical Fiber Cable (when not used)

Optical connector Optical

connector cover

Optical fiber

cable capsOptical fiber

cable

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-278-

(B) Optical fiber cable

• Though the reinforcing sheath section used for the optical fiber cable is

sufficiently mechanically strong, take care not to drop heavy objects on

it.

• When connecting or disconnecting the optical connector, hold it by its

connector. Do not connect or disconnect the connector holding it directly

by its cord.

• After the optical connector is connected it is automatically locked by the

lock lever on its top surface to prevent it from becoming disconnected by

the connector being pulled. For this reason, before you disconnect the

optical connector, first unlock the lock lever. The optical connector is

also designed so that it cannot be inserted in the opposite direction.

Before you insert the connector, make sure that it is facing the correct

direction.

Lock Lever on Optical Connector

• When you lay optical fiber cable, pre-treat the optical connectors as

shown below. Pull the reinforcing sheath section out onto a wire w/ hook

or tension member as shown in the figure. Be careful to prevent tension

force from being applied to the optical connector.

Protecting the Optical Connector and Optical Fiber Cable (when laid)

Optical

connector

Optical

connector

Wire w/

hook

Tape

Tension

member

Reinforcing sheath

section

Reinforcing sheath

section

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-279-

• Fasten the reinforcing sheath section to the cable clamp so that the

weight of the optical fiber cable is not directly applied on the connecting

section of the optical connector.

Fixing the Optical Fiber Cable

Optical

connector

Optical fiber

cord

Cable clamp (sponge filling)

Recommended part: CKN-13SP

made by Kitagawa Kogyo Ltd.

Optical

connector

Minimum bending radius of 25 mm

(as large a radius a possible is recommended)

Minimum bending radius of 50 mm

(as large a radius a possible is recommended)

D. DNC1 APPENDIX B-75044EN/02

-280-

D.11 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Layout of DNC1 Board Components

LED1COP1

SW1

Check pin

(+5V)

Check pin

(0V)

JD5LED5

B-75044EN/02 APPENDIX D. DNC1

-281-

DNC1 Board External Dimensions

53.21

170.78

155.48

106.17

2.90

11.40

Component mounting height

3.512121.57

7.62

21.24

100.33

120

141.24

Unit: mm

Loopback Connector Wiring Diagram

01 SD14 CS

08 TT

02 *SD

09 *TT

15 *CS

03 TR16

04 *TR

10 RD

17

11 *RD

05 RS

12 DM

18 RT

06 *RS19 *RT

07 SG

13 *DM

20

01 SD

02 *SD

10 RD

11 *RD

08 TT

09 *TT

18 RT

19 *RT

05 RS

06 *RS

14 CS

15 *CS

12 DM

13 *DM

03 TR

04 *TR

Recommended connector

Made by Honda Tsushin

MR-20FH (20-pin, female)

MR-20NSB (case)

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

DNC1 OPTICAL TAP SPECIFICATION

Page

1. OUTLINE..............................................................................................................2

2. SPECIFICATION.................................................................................................3

2.1 CONNECTION OF ELECTRIC CABLE................................................................................... 4

2.2 CONNECTION OF OPTICAL CABLE..................................................................................... 5

2.2.1 Extension Between Primary Station and Secondary Station ............................................................5

2.2.2 Extension Between Secondary Stations ...........................................................................................6

2.2.3 Extension of One Secondary Station (Extension of Branch Cable) .................................................7

2.2.4 Extension of Two or More Secondary Stations (Extension of Trunk Line) .....................................8

2.3 CABLE LENGTH..................................................................................................................... 10

2.4 CONFIGURATION FOR DUSTPROOF CABINET MODEL OF F-D MATE...................... 11

2.5 SHIELDING AND GRANDING.............................................................................................. 12

2.6 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTICAL TAP................................................................................... 14

2.6.1 Setting Switch and LEDs ...............................................................................................................15

2.6.2 Interface of Power Supply..............................................................................................................17

2.6.3 Specification of Power Cable, Housing and Contact......................................................................17

2.6.4 Specification of Optical Cable .......................................................................................................17

2.7 OUTSIDE AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS OF AN OPTICAL TAP................................. 18

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all

the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.

Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as "impossible".

1. OUTLINE B-75044EN/02

-2-

1 OUTLINE

The optical tap is an adapter used in the FANUC-developed high-speed

network DNC1 (connection mode 1). It connects two taps and a node using

optical fiber cable.

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-3-

2 SPECIFICATION

(ALSE REFER TO FANUC DNC1 SPECIFICATION - B-61782E)

There are three types of DNC1 optical tap - "OPT-TAP A", "OPT-TAP B"

and "OPT-TAP C". In this manual, "ELEC-TAP" means a tap for the

electrical interface and "TAP" means a DNC1 optical tap or a tap for the

electrical interface.

Use a shielded twisted-pair cable to connect a tap with another tap or a tap

with a primary station or secondary station. In the following text, the

shielded twisted-pair cable is referred to as an electric cable.

Type of

Optical tapOPT-TAP A OPT-TAP B OPT-TAP C

Interface Elect-Interface 3

Opt-Interface 1

Elect-Interface 3

Opt-Interface 1

Elect-Interface 1

Opt-Interface 2

Function For trunk line and

branch line

For trunk line and

branch line

For trunk line

NOTE

1 "OPT-TAP A" and "OPT-TAP B" has three electrical interface each

other. These three interface has same function.

2 "OPT-TAP C" has two optical interface and these interface are

different. Connect the "COP1" to the primary tap and connect the

"COP2" to secondary tap.

Fig.1 Symbols

: Terminating resister unit

: Power supply unit

(DC+24V 0.3A)

: Electric tap

: OPT-TAP A

: OPT-TAP B

: OPT-TAP C

: Optical interface

: Electric interface

: Optical cable

: Electric cable

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-4-

2.1 CONNECTION OF ELECTRIC CABLE

Fig.2 shows an example of DNC1 configuration in which the primary station

(F-D Mate) is connected to four secondary stations (CNCs).

Fig.2 Example of DNC1 Configuration

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-5-

2.2 CONNECTION OF OPTICAL CABLE

When the total length of trunk cable (lt) exceeds 200m (at a transfer rate of

230.4kbps) or 100m (at a transfer rate of 460.8kbps) and the length of a

branch cable (ld) exceeds 0.5m, it is necessary to extend by using optical tap.

2.2.1 Extension Between Primary Station and Secondary Station

Fig.3 shows the extension between F-D Mate and CNC #1

Fig.3 Extension between primary station and secondary station

The "OPT-TAP A" must be set on the primary station side and the "OPT-

TAP B" must be set the secondary station side.

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-6-

2.2.2 Extension Between Secondary Stations

Fig.4 shows the extension between secondary station #2 and #3.

Fig.4 Extension between secondary stations

The "OPT-TAP A" must be set on the primary station side of the transfer

path.

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-7-

2.2.3 Extension of One Secondary Station (Extension of Branch Cable)

Fig.5 shows the extension of the secondary station #2.

Fig.5 Extension of the branch cable

The "OPT-TAP A" must be set on the primary station side (the trunk cable

side) and the "OPT-TAP B" must be set on the secondary station side.

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-8-

2.2.4 Extension of Two or More Secondary Stations

Fig.6 shows the extension of the secondary station #2 and #3.

Fig.6 Extension of two secondary stations (Extension of trunk line)

NOTE

3 The "OPT-TAP C" is used to extend the trunk line. The same system

is designed to extend the branch line. (Refer Fig.7)

In case of extension of secondary stations, please consider which line

is extended trunk or branch line.

4 The power of optical tap which is connected to trunk line, is always

turned on or turned on/off at the same time the power of primary

station is turned on/off. If the power of "OPT-TAP A" in Fig.6 is

independently turned off, the communication with secondary station

#2, #3 and #4 is broken off.

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-9-

Fig.7 Extension of two secondary stations (Extension of branch line)

NOTE

5 In the case of extension of branch line, the power of "OPT-TAP B"

which is connected to secondary station can be turned on/off at the

same time the power of secondary station is turned on/off. But the

power of "OPT-TAP A" which is connected to trunk line is always

turned on or turned on/off at the same time the power of primary

station is turned on/off.

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-10-

2.3 CABLE LENGTH (FOR THE DUSTPROOF CABINET MODEL,

SEE 2.4)

Fig.8 Cable length when optical taps are used (1)

Fig.9 Cable length when optical taps are used (2)

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-11-

2.4 CONFIGURATION FOR DUSTPROOF CABINET MODEL OF

F-D MATE

For the dustproof cabinet model of the F-D Mate and stand-alone CNCs,

optical taps must be installed outside. When the branch cable length exceeds

0.5m, the cable must be connected to the optical tap via a tap. The total cable

length must be less than 200m (at a transfer rate of 230.4kpbs) or 100m (at a

transfer rate of 460.8kbps).

Fig.10 Configuration for dustproof cabinet model of the F-D Mate

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-12-

2.5 SHIELDING AND GRANDING

NOTE

Be sure to shield for the electric cable.

Shielding is to peel off the portion of the cable sheath to expose the shield

layer inside and fix the exposed shield layer to the ground plate using cable

clamps.

An electric cable is a shielded twisted-pair cable used to connect a tap, CNC,

or F-D Mate to a tap or optical tap.

For information on the cable clamps and ground plate, refer to the connection

manual of the CNC or F-D Mate.

Fig.11 Shielding

Connect the frame grounds of the CNCs and F-D Mate to which electric

cables are connected using a ground wire with a cross-sectional area of 5.5

mm2 or more.

Notice, however, that when two devices are connected via an optical tap,

their frame grounds should not be linked. For example, in Fig.4, the frame

grounds of the primary station and secondary station #1 and #2 are linked

using a ground wire. Secondary stations #3 and #4 are alse linked, while no

frame ground connection is provided between stations #2 and #3.

Cable

Ground plate

Cable clamp

Shield layer

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-13-

Connect an optical tap to the frame ground using a ground wire with a cross

sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more (Class 3 or higher grounding).

Fig.12 Frame ground terminal

M4-Frame ground (FG) terminal

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-14-

2.6 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTICAL TAP

Item Specifications

Ordering number Type Ordering No. Interface

A, B A13B-0156-C300 Electric: 3 Optical: 1

C A13B-0156-C301 Electric: 1 Optical: 2

Note : Optical tap operation modes A and B can be switched using the switch on the printed circuit board.

Power Supply +24VDC to each optical tap.

Voltage : +24VDC +10%, -15%

Current : 0.3A max (excluding surge currents)

Turn on the power of optical taps at the same time the power of the primary and secondary station is turned

on. Refer note 4) and note 5)

External dimensions 190 � 150 � 50mm Refer Fig.15

W H D

Mounting method Install an optical tap contained in a special unit inside the power magnetics cabinet Refer Fig.16

Environmental

conditionsAmbient temperture : 0 to 60�C

Relatice humidity : 5 to 75% (Condensation shall not occur.)

Vibration : 0.5 G or less

Setting Type switch Function

A B SW1 Switch the transfer rate between 460.8kbps and 230.4kbps.Use the swicthes on

the P.C.B.SW2 Switch the operation mode between A and B.

C SW1 Switch the transfer rate between 460.8kbps and 230.4kbps.

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-15-

2.6.1 Setting Switch and LEDs

1) In the case of "OPT-TAP A" and "OPT-TAP B"

Fig.13 Switches and LEDs of "OPT-TAP A" and "OPT-TAP B"

Functions of LEDs

LED Name Functions

(1) P5 Pilot LED Power is supplied

(2) BUSY Receive the data frame from optical interface

(3) B "OPT-TAP B" is selected by the switch SW2

(4) 460K 460.8kpbs is selected by the switch SW1

Setting switches

Switch the transfer rate Switch the operation mode

(1) (2) (3) (4)

LED

Switch SW1 Switch SW2

SW1

460.8kbps 230.4kbps

SW2

B A

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-16-

2) In the case of "OPT-TAP C"

Fig.14 Switch and LEDs of "OPT-TAP C"

Functions of LEDs

LED Name Functions

(1) PON Pilot LED Power is supplied.

(2) 460K 460.8kbps is selected by the switch SW1

(3) START1 DPLL of primary station side is acting.

(4) START2 DPLL of secondary station side is acting.

Setting switch

Switch the transfer rate

(1) (2) (3) (4)

LED

Switch SW1

SW1

230.4kbps 460.8kbps

B-75044EN/02 2. SPECIFICATION

-17-

2.6.2 Interface of Power Supply

CP1

1 2 3

Y +24V 0V (Input)

X +24V 0V (No use)

• Power can be supplied from both Y type connector and X type connector.

Basically, please supplid from Y type connector.

2.6.3 Specification of Power Cable, Housing and Contact

Name Specification of FANUC Specification of Japan AMP

Y type housing A63L-0001-0460#3LKY 2-178288-3

X type housing A63L-0001-0460#3LKX 1-178288-3

Contact A63L-0001-0456#BS…. 175218-5…

We prepare the kit for cable making as follows.

Specifications

A02B-0120-K323 Y type housing �1 Contact �3

A02B-0120-K324 X type housing �P Contact �3

• Material of cable : Vintyl wire (16 to 20 AWG)

• Determine the length of the wire so that the rated power voltage is

achieved at the receiving end. Taking into account voltage drop due to the

resistance of the wire and power fluctuation.

2.6.4 Specification of Optical Cable

Cable type Cable length Specifications

Optical cable (m)

(m)

(m)

A66L-6001-0009#L R3

A66L-6001-0009#L R03

A66L-6001-0009#L R003

Ex. 100m A66L-6001-0009#L100R3

Minimum length : 1m

Maximum length : 200m

Y type housing

2. SPECIFICATION B-75044EN/02

-18-

2.7 OUTSIDE AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS OF AN OPTICAL TAP

Fig.15 Outside dimensions for an optical tap

Fig.16 Mounting dimensions

180

160

150

30

90

160

90

4-M4

B-75044EN/02INDEX

A

About FA SYSTEM for PC 1

About Log Message 167

About Log Viewer 171

ABOUT NC PROGRAM FORMAT 13

About Sample Program 76

About Starting Applications You Have Developed 75

About the Development Language of

the Application Program 74

About The NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

Window 49

Adding Internet Service 30

B

Browsing, Editing and Creating New Files 58

C

Canceling Computer Start Download

< F_DownloadCancel > 157

Canceling Computer Start Upload

< F_UploadCancel > 158

Communication Settings for Machine 38

Computer Start DNC Operation < F_Dnc... > 153

Conditions for using the DNC1 driver 239

Confirmation of Communication < F_IsOpen > 99

Confirmation of DNC1 Connection

< F_ConfirmDnc1 > 124

Copying, Moving, Deleting and Renaming Files 56

Cycle Start < F_Start > 115

D

Deleting NC Program in NC < F_Delete > 117

Details of List File Extended Transfer Function 21

Details of List File Separate Transfer Function 20

Details of Subprogram Extended Transfer Function 17

Details of Subprogram Separate Transfer Function 16

DIAGNOSIS AND OTHER SERVICES 159

DNC1 23, 26

DNC1 BOARD, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE AND

OPTICAL CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS 276

DNC1, DNC2 200

DNC1/ETHERNET 213

Dnc1HardTest 246

Dnc1LogViewer 268

Dnc1Test 251

DNC2, Reader/Puncher 27

Download Settings for Machine 43

Downloading NC Program requested by Computer

< F_Download... > 107

E

EDIT LIST FILE SCREEN OPERATIONS 180

Editing List Files 183

End of Communication Process

< F_TerminateCommunication > * 97

End of FA LIBRARY < F_End > 162

End of Receiving Notice Message

< F_StopNotice > 104

Error Code 214

Establishing DNC1 Connection

< F_EstablishDnc1 > 123

External Reset < F_Reset > 114

F

FA LIBRARY 71

For Setting FA SYSTEM for PC 31

Freeing Descriptor ID < F_FreeID > 160

G

General Settings for Machine 36

Getting Descriptor ID of Notice Message

< F_GetNoticeID > 104

Getting Error Code < F_GetLastError > 161

Getting Information about Machine

< F_GetMachineInfo > 106

Getting List of Communicating Machines

< F_GetOpenMachineNumber > 102

Getting List of Registered Machine Numbers

<F_GetAllMachineNumber > 100

INDEX B-75044EN/02

i-2

Getting Number of Data < F_GetCount > 159

Getting Result of Asynchronous Treatment

< F_Response > 161

Getting the Notice Message of the File Transfer

< F_CopyNoticeFileTransfer > 105

H

How to Read the Library Function 73

I

Initialization Processing < F_Begin > 159

L

LIST FILE MANAGEMENT 179

List File Monitor Operations 190

LIST FILE MONITOR SCREEN OPERATIONS 189

LIST FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION 18

List File Transfer Monitor and Control Functions 21

LOG LIBRARY 163

Log Viewer 167

Log Server 177

M

Machine Information Settings 35

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 280

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION OF

DNC1BOARD 273

Moving Offset Location of Data < F_Seek > 160

N

NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 47

O

Observation of FA SYSTEM for PC 166

P

PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING RELATED

PARTS 277

R

Reader/Puncher 205

Reading Alarm Information < F_ReadAlarm > 126

Reading Custom Macro Variable

< F_ReadCustomMacroVariable > 135

Reading List of NC Program in NC

< F_AllFileDirectory > 120

Reading NC Identification < F_Identify > 119

Reading NC Parameters < F_ReadParameter > 148

Reading PMC Data < F_ReadPMCData > 144

Reading Tool Life Management Information

< F_ReadToolLife > 140

Reading Tool Offset < F_ReadToolOffset > 128

Relation between FA SYSTEM for PC and

Protocols 5

REQUEST SERVICE 107

S

Sample of NC Parameter Settings 195

Sample Operation for NC 199

Saving and Restoring Settings 45

Selecting NC Program in NC < F_Select > 116

Selecting the NC Program on the PC 66

Service Type 72

Setting FA SYSTEM for PC 29

Setting log creation ON/OFF 177

Setting Options 69

Setting up DNC1 Driver 241

Setting up TCP/IP 29

Setting up the DNC1 Board 240

Setup 23

Start of Communication < F_Open > 98

Start of Communication Process

< F_CreateCommunication > * 96

Start of Receiving Notice Message

< F_StartNotice > 103

Starting and Stopping the Communication Process 34

Starting LogServer < F_InvokeLogServer > 165

Stop of Communication < F_Close > 99

Structure of Edit List File Screen 180

B-75044EN/02 INDEX

i-3

Structure of List File Monitor Screen 189

SUBPROGRAM TRANSFER FUNCTION 14

System Configuration 35

System Requirements 24

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR DNC1

BOARD 237

System Service 95

T

Terminating LogServer

< F_TerminateLogServer > 165

The Contents of Log File 170

The Contents of Transmission Log File 169

Transmitting an NC Program 61

Transmitting by Operating NC PROGRAM

MANAGEMENT 7

Transmitting by Operating NC Side 10

Transmitting by Using FA LIBRARY 8

TRANSMITTING NC PROGRAM 7

U

Upload Settings for Machine 44

Uploading NC Program Requested by Computer

< F_Upload... > 111

Using Log Viewer 172

Using NC PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 49

W

Work with the Directory List 54

Work with the File List 51

Writing Custom Macro Variable

< F_WriteCustomMacroVariable > 138

Writing NC Parameters < F_WriteParameter > 151

Writing PMC Data< F_WritePMCData > 146

Writing Tool Offset < F_WriteToolOffset > 132

Re

vis

ion

Re

co

rd

FA

NU

C F

A S

YS

TE

M f

or

PC

OP

ER

AT

OR

’S M

AN

UA

L (

B-7

5044E

N)

02

Mar.

, ‘9

9

Additio

n o

f

�D

NC

1/E

thern

et com

munic

ation f

unction

�S

ubpro

gra

m tra

nsfe

r fu

nction

�Lis

t file

tra

nsfe

r fu

nction

�D

NC

1 o

ptical ta

p h

ard

ware

specific

ation

01

Editio

nD

ate

Conte

nts

Editio

nD

ate

Conte

nts